Mercurial > vim
annotate src/gui.c @ 5082:7b20dc804164 v7.3.1284
updated for version 7.3.1284
Problem: Compiler warnings in MS-Windows clipboard handling.
Solution: Add type casts. (Ken Takata)
| author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Mon, 01 Jul 2013 21:08:48 +0200 |
| parents | cf52d2a8c05c |
| children | 50dbef5e774a |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 7 | 1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: |
| 2 * | |
| 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar | |
| 4 * GUI/Motif support by Robert Webb | |
| 5 * | |
| 6 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. | |
| 7 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. | |
| 8 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. | |
| 9 */ | |
| 10 | |
| 11 #include "vim.h" | |
| 12 | |
| 13 /* Structure containing all the GUI information */ | |
| 14 gui_T gui; | |
| 15 | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
16 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 17 static void set_guifontwide __ARGS((char_u *font_name)); |
| 18 #endif | |
| 19 static void gui_check_pos __ARGS((void)); | |
| 20 static void gui_position_components __ARGS((int)); | |
| 21 static void gui_outstr __ARGS((char_u *, int)); | |
| 22 static int gui_screenchar __ARGS((int off, int flags, guicolor_T fg, guicolor_T bg, int back)); | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
23 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 24 static int gui_screenstr __ARGS((int off, int len, int flags, guicolor_T fg, guicolor_T bg, int back)); |
| 25 #endif | |
| 26 static void gui_delete_lines __ARGS((int row, int count)); | |
| 27 static void gui_insert_lines __ARGS((int row, int count)); | |
| 28 static void fill_mouse_coord __ARGS((char_u *p, int col, int row)); | |
| 685 | 29 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO) |
| 30 static int gui_has_tabline __ARGS((void)); | |
| 31 #endif | |
| 7 | 32 static void gui_do_scrollbar __ARGS((win_T *wp, int which, int enable)); |
| 33 static colnr_T scroll_line_len __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
34 static linenr_T gui_find_longest_lnum __ARGS((void)); |
| 7 | 35 static void gui_update_horiz_scrollbar __ARGS((int)); |
| 203 | 36 static void gui_set_fg_color __ARGS((char_u *name)); |
| 37 static void gui_set_bg_color __ARGS((char_u *name)); | |
| 7 | 38 static win_T *xy2win __ARGS((int x, int y)); |
| 39 | |
| 3772 | 40 #if defined(UNIX) && !defined(MACOS_X) && !defined(__APPLE__) |
| 3087 | 41 # define MAY_FORK |
| 42 static void gui_do_fork __ARGS((void)); | |
| 43 | |
| 44 static int gui_read_child_pipe __ARGS((int fd)); | |
| 45 | |
| 46 /* Return values for gui_read_child_pipe */ | |
| 47 enum { | |
| 48 GUI_CHILD_IO_ERROR, | |
| 49 GUI_CHILD_OK, | |
| 50 GUI_CHILD_FAILED | |
| 51 }; | |
| 52 | |
| 53 #endif /* MAY_FORK */ | |
| 54 | |
| 55 static void gui_attempt_start __ARGS((void)); | |
| 56 | |
| 7 | 57 static int can_update_cursor = TRUE; /* can display the cursor */ |
| 58 | |
| 59 /* | |
| 60 * The Athena scrollbars can move the thumb to after the end of the scrollbar, | |
| 61 * this makes the thumb indicate the part of the text that is shown. Motif | |
| 62 * can't do this. | |
| 63 */ | |
| 64 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_ATHENA) || defined(FEAT_GUI_MAC) | |
| 65 # define SCROLL_PAST_END | |
| 66 #endif | |
| 67 | |
| 68 /* | |
| 69 * gui_start -- Called when user wants to start the GUI. | |
| 70 * | |
| 71 * Careful: This function can be called recursively when there is a ":gui" | |
| 72 * command in the .gvimrc file. Only the first call should fork, not the | |
| 73 * recursive call. | |
| 74 */ | |
| 75 void | |
| 76 gui_start() | |
| 77 { | |
| 78 char_u *old_term; | |
| 79 static int recursive = 0; | |
| 80 | |
| 81 old_term = vim_strsave(T_NAME); | |
| 82 | |
| 83 settmode(TMODE_COOK); /* stop RAW mode */ | |
| 84 if (full_screen) | |
| 85 cursor_on(); /* needed for ":gui" in .vimrc */ | |
| 86 full_screen = FALSE; | |
| 87 | |
| 3087 | 88 ++recursive; |
| 2923 | 89 |
| 7 | 90 #ifdef MAY_FORK |
| 3087 | 91 /* |
| 92 * Quit the current process and continue in the child. | |
| 93 * Makes "gvim file" disconnect from the shell it was started in. | |
| 94 * Don't do this when Vim was started with "-f" or the 'f' flag is present | |
| 95 * in 'guioptions'. | |
| 96 */ | |
| 97 if (gui.dofork && !vim_strchr(p_go, GO_FORG) && recursive <= 1) | |
| 98 { | |
| 99 gui_do_fork(); | |
| 100 } | |
| 101 else | |
| 102 #endif | |
| 103 { | |
| 3541 | 104 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 3539 | 105 /* If there is 'f' in 'guioptions' and specify -g argument, |
| 106 * gui_mch_init_check() was not called yet. */ | |
| 107 if (gui_mch_init_check() != OK) | |
| 108 exit(1); | |
| 3541 | 109 #endif |
| 3087 | 110 gui_attempt_start(); |
| 111 } | |
| 7 | 112 |
| 113 if (!gui.in_use) /* failed to start GUI */ | |
| 114 { | |
| 3087 | 115 /* Back to old term settings |
| 116 * | |
| 117 * FIXME: If we got here because a child process failed and flagged to | |
| 118 * the parent to resume, and X11 is enabled with FEAT_TITLE, this will | |
| 119 * hit an X11 I/O error and do a longjmp(), leaving recursive | |
| 120 * permanently set to 1. This is probably not as big a problem as it | |
| 121 * sounds, because gui_mch_init() in both gui_x11.c and gui_gtk_x11.c | |
| 122 * return "OK" unconditionally, so it would be very difficult to | |
| 123 * actually hit this case. | |
| 124 */ | |
| 125 termcapinit(old_term); | |
| 7 | 126 settmode(TMODE_RAW); /* restart RAW mode */ |
| 127 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE | |
| 128 set_title_defaults(); /* set 'title' and 'icon' again */ | |
| 129 #endif | |
| 130 } | |
| 131 | |
| 132 vim_free(old_term); | |
| 133 | |
| 3087 | 134 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD |
| 135 /* If the GUI started successfully, trigger the GUIEnter event, otherwise | |
| 136 * the GUIFailed event. */ | |
| 137 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 138 apply_autocmds(gui.in_use ? EVENT_GUIENTER : EVENT_GUIFAILED, | |
| 139 NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf); | |
| 140 #endif | |
| 141 --recursive; | |
| 142 } | |
| 143 | |
| 144 /* | |
| 145 * Set_termname() will call gui_init() to start the GUI. | |
| 146 * Set the "starting" flag, to indicate that the GUI will start. | |
| 147 * | |
| 148 * We don't want to open the GUI shell until after we've read .gvimrc, | |
| 149 * otherwise we don't know what font we will use, and hence we don't know | |
| 150 * what size the shell should be. So if there are errors in the .gvimrc | |
| 151 * file, they will have to go to the terminal: Set full_screen to FALSE. | |
| 152 * full_screen will be set to TRUE again by a successful termcapinit(). | |
| 153 */ | |
| 154 static void | |
| 155 gui_attempt_start() | |
| 156 { | |
| 157 static int recursive = 0; | |
| 158 | |
| 159 ++recursive; | |
| 160 gui.starting = TRUE; | |
| 161 | |
| 162 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 163 gui.event_time = GDK_CURRENT_TIME; | |
| 164 #endif | |
| 165 | |
| 166 termcapinit((char_u *)"builtin_gui"); | |
| 167 gui.starting = recursive - 1; | |
| 168 | |
| 574 | 169 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) |
| 7 | 170 if (gui.in_use) |
| 2609 | 171 { |
| 172 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL | |
| 173 Window x11_window; | |
| 174 Display *x11_display; | |
| 175 | |
| 176 if (gui_get_x11_windis(&x11_window, &x11_display) == OK) | |
| 177 set_vim_var_nr(VV_WINDOWID, (long)x11_window); | |
| 178 # endif | |
| 179 | |
| 7 | 180 /* Display error messages in a dialog now. */ |
| 181 display_errors(); | |
| 2609 | 182 } |
| 7 | 183 #endif |
| 3087 | 184 --recursive; |
| 185 } | |
| 186 | |
| 187 #ifdef MAY_FORK | |
| 188 | |
| 189 /* for waitpid() */ | |
| 190 # if defined(HAVE_SYS_WAIT_H) || defined(HAVE_UNION_WAIT) | |
| 191 # include <sys/wait.h> | |
| 192 # endif | |
| 193 | |
| 194 /* | |
| 195 * Create a new process, by forking. In the child, start the GUI, and in | |
| 196 * the parent, exit. | |
| 197 * | |
| 198 * If something goes wrong, this will return with gui.in_use still set | |
| 199 * to FALSE, in which case the caller should continue execution without | |
| 200 * the GUI. | |
| 201 * | |
| 202 * If the child fails to start the GUI, then the child will exit and the | |
| 203 * parent will return. If the child succeeds, then the parent will exit | |
| 204 * and the child will return. | |
| 205 */ | |
| 206 static void | |
| 207 gui_do_fork() | |
| 208 { | |
| 209 int pipefd[2]; /* pipe between parent and child */ | |
| 210 int pipe_error; | |
| 211 int status; | |
| 212 int exit_status; | |
| 213 pid_t pid = -1; | |
| 214 | |
| 215 /* Setup a pipe between the child and the parent, so that the parent | |
| 216 * knows when the child has done the setsid() call and is allowed to | |
| 217 * exit. */ | |
| 218 pipe_error = (pipe(pipefd) < 0); | |
| 219 pid = fork(); | |
| 220 if (pid < 0) /* Fork error */ | |
| 7 | 221 { |
| 3087 | 222 EMSG(_("E851: Failed to create a new process for the GUI")); |
| 223 return; | |
| 224 } | |
| 225 else if (pid > 0) /* Parent */ | |
| 226 { | |
| 227 /* Give the child some time to do the setsid(), otherwise the | |
| 228 * exit() may kill the child too (when starting gvim from inside a | |
| 229 * gvim). */ | |
| 230 if (!pipe_error) | |
| 7 | 231 { |
| 3087 | 232 /* The read returns when the child closes the pipe (or when |
| 233 * the child dies for some reason). */ | |
| 234 close(pipefd[1]); | |
| 235 status = gui_read_child_pipe(pipefd[0]); | |
| 236 if (status == GUI_CHILD_FAILED) | |
| 7 | 237 { |
| 3087 | 238 /* The child failed to start the GUI, so the caller must |
| 239 * continue. There may be more error information written | |
| 240 * to stderr by the child. */ | |
| 241 # ifdef __NeXT__ | |
| 242 wait4(pid, &exit_status, 0, (struct rusage *)0); | |
| 243 # else | |
| 244 waitpid(pid, &exit_status, 0); | |
| 245 # endif | |
| 246 EMSG(_("E852: The child process failed to start the GUI")); | |
| 247 return; | |
| 7 | 248 } |
| 3087 | 249 else if (status == GUI_CHILD_IO_ERROR) |
| 250 { | |
| 251 pipe_error = TRUE; | |
| 252 } | |
| 253 /* else GUI_CHILD_OK: parent exit */ | |
| 7 | 254 } |
| 255 | |
| 3087 | 256 if (pipe_error) |
| 257 ui_delay(300L, TRUE); | |
| 258 | |
| 259 /* When swapping screens we may need to go to the next line, e.g., | |
| 260 * after a hit-enter prompt and using ":gui". */ | |
| 261 if (newline_on_exit) | |
| 262 mch_errmsg("\r\n"); | |
| 263 | |
| 264 /* | |
| 265 * The parent must skip the normal exit() processing, the child | |
| 266 * will do it. For example, GTK messes up signals when exiting. | |
| 267 */ | |
| 268 _exit(0); | |
| 269 } | |
| 270 /* Child */ | |
| 271 | |
| 3518 | 272 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 273 /* Call gtk_init_check() here after fork(). See gui_init_check(). */ | |
| 274 if (gui_mch_init_check() != OK) | |
| 275 exit(1); | |
| 276 #endif | |
| 277 | |
| 7 | 278 # if defined(HAVE_SETSID) || defined(HAVE_SETPGID) |
| 3087 | 279 /* |
| 280 * Change our process group. On some systems/shells a CTRL-C in the | |
| 281 * shell where Vim was started would otherwise kill gvim! | |
| 282 */ | |
| 7 | 283 # if defined(HAVE_SETSID) |
| 3087 | 284 (void)setsid(); |
| 7 | 285 # else |
| 3087 | 286 (void)setpgid(0, 0); |
| 7 | 287 # endif |
| 288 # endif | |
| 3087 | 289 if (!pipe_error) |
| 290 close(pipefd[0]); | |
| 7 | 291 |
| 292 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 3087 | 293 /* Tell the session manager our new PID */ |
| 294 gui_mch_forked(); | |
| 7 | 295 # endif |
| 3087 | 296 |
| 297 /* Try to start the GUI */ | |
| 298 gui_attempt_start(); | |
| 299 | |
| 300 /* Notify the parent */ | |
| 3147 | 301 if (!pipe_error) |
| 3087 | 302 { |
| 3147 | 303 if (gui.in_use) |
| 304 write_eintr(pipefd[1], "ok", 3); | |
| 305 else | |
| 306 write_eintr(pipefd[1], "fail", 5); | |
| 307 close(pipefd[1]); | |
| 3087 | 308 } |
| 309 | |
| 310 /* If we failed to start the GUI, exit now. */ | |
| 311 if (!gui.in_use) | |
| 312 exit(1); | |
| 7 | 313 } |
| 314 | |
| 315 /* | |
| 3087 | 316 * Read from a pipe assumed to be connected to the child process (this |
| 317 * function is called from the parent). | |
| 318 * Return GUI_CHILD_OK if the child successfully started the GUI, | |
| 319 * GUY_CHILD_FAILED if the child failed, or GUI_CHILD_IO_ERROR if there was | |
| 320 * some other error. | |
| 321 * | |
| 322 * The file descriptor will be closed before the function returns. | |
| 323 */ | |
| 324 static int | |
| 325 gui_read_child_pipe(int fd) | |
| 326 { | |
| 3147 | 327 long bytes_read; |
| 328 #define READ_BUFFER_SIZE 10 | |
| 329 char buffer[READ_BUFFER_SIZE]; | |
| 330 | |
| 331 bytes_read = read_eintr(fd, buffer, READ_BUFFER_SIZE - 1); | |
| 332 #undef READ_BUFFER_SIZE | |
| 333 close(fd); | |
| 334 if (bytes_read < 0) | |
| 3087 | 335 return GUI_CHILD_IO_ERROR; |
| 3147 | 336 buffer[bytes_read] = NUL; |
| 3087 | 337 if (strcmp(buffer, "ok") == 0) |
| 338 return GUI_CHILD_OK; | |
| 339 return GUI_CHILD_FAILED; | |
| 340 } | |
| 341 | |
| 342 #endif /* MAY_FORK */ | |
| 343 | |
| 344 /* | |
| 7 | 345 * Call this when vim starts up, whether or not the GUI is started |
| 346 */ | |
| 347 void | |
| 348 gui_prepare(argc, argv) | |
| 349 int *argc; | |
| 350 char **argv; | |
| 351 { | |
| 352 gui.in_use = FALSE; /* No GUI yet (maybe later) */ | |
| 353 gui.starting = FALSE; /* No GUI yet (maybe later) */ | |
| 354 gui_mch_prepare(argc, argv); | |
| 355 } | |
| 356 | |
| 357 /* | |
| 358 * Try initializing the GUI and check if it can be started. | |
| 359 * Used from main() to check early if "vim -g" can start the GUI. | |
| 360 * Used from gui_init() to prepare for starting the GUI. | |
| 361 * Returns FAIL or OK. | |
| 362 */ | |
| 363 int | |
| 364 gui_init_check() | |
| 365 { | |
| 366 static int result = MAYBE; | |
| 367 | |
| 368 if (result != MAYBE) | |
| 369 { | |
| 370 if (result == FAIL) | |
| 371 EMSG(_("E229: Cannot start the GUI")); | |
| 372 return result; | |
| 373 } | |
| 374 | |
| 375 gui.shell_created = FALSE; | |
| 376 gui.dying = FALSE; | |
| 377 gui.in_focus = TRUE; /* so the guicursor setting works */ | |
| 378 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_NONE; | |
| 379 gui.dragged_wp = NULL; | |
| 380 gui.pointer_hidden = FALSE; | |
| 381 gui.col = 0; | |
| 382 gui.row = 0; | |
| 383 gui.num_cols = Columns; | |
| 384 gui.num_rows = Rows; | |
| 385 | |
| 386 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 387 gui.scroll_region_top = 0; | |
| 388 gui.scroll_region_bot = Rows - 1; | |
| 389 gui.scroll_region_left = 0; | |
| 390 gui.scroll_region_right = Columns - 1; | |
| 391 gui.highlight_mask = HL_NORMAL; | |
| 392 gui.char_width = 1; | |
| 393 gui.char_height = 1; | |
| 394 gui.char_ascent = 0; | |
| 395 gui.border_width = 0; | |
| 396 | |
| 397 gui.norm_font = NOFONT; | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
398 #ifndef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 399 gui.bold_font = NOFONT; |
| 400 gui.ital_font = NOFONT; | |
| 401 gui.boldital_font = NOFONT; | |
| 402 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 403 gui.fontset = NOFONTSET; | |
| 404 # endif | |
| 405 #endif | |
|
4950
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
406 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
407 gui.wide_font = NOFONT; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
408 # ifndef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
409 gui.wide_bold_font = NOFONT; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
410 gui.wide_ital_font = NOFONT; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
411 gui.wide_boldital_font = NOFONT; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
412 # endif |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
413 #endif |
| 7 | 414 |
| 415 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
416 # ifndef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 417 # ifdef FONTSET_ALWAYS |
| 418 gui.menu_fontset = NOFONTSET; | |
| 419 # else | |
| 420 gui.menu_font = NOFONT; | |
| 421 # endif | |
| 422 # endif | |
| 423 gui.menu_is_active = TRUE; /* default: include menu */ | |
| 424 # ifndef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 425 gui.menu_height = MENU_DEFAULT_HEIGHT; | |
| 426 gui.menu_width = 0; | |
| 427 # endif | |
| 428 #endif | |
| 429 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) && (defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) || defined(FEAT_GUI_ATHENA)) | |
| 430 gui.toolbar_height = 0; | |
| 431 #endif | |
| 432 #if defined(FEAT_FOOTER) && defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) | |
| 433 gui.footer_height = 0; | |
| 434 #endif | |
| 435 #ifdef FEAT_BEVAL_TIP | |
| 436 gui.tooltip_fontset = NOFONTSET; | |
| 437 #endif | |
| 438 | |
| 439 gui.scrollbar_width = gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
| 440 gui.prev_wrap = -1; | |
| 441 | |
| 442 #ifdef ALWAYS_USE_GUI | |
| 443 result = OK; | |
| 444 #else | |
| 3518 | 445 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 446 /* | |
| 447 * Note: Don't call gtk_init_check() before fork, it will be called after | |
| 448 * the fork. When calling it before fork, it make vim hang for a while. | |
| 449 * See gui_do_fork(). | |
| 450 * Use a simpler check if the GUI window can probably be opened. | |
| 451 */ | |
| 452 result = gui.dofork ? gui_mch_early_init_check() : gui_mch_init_check(); | |
| 453 # else | |
| 7 | 454 result = gui_mch_init_check(); |
| 3518 | 455 # endif |
| 7 | 456 #endif |
| 457 return result; | |
| 458 } | |
| 459 | |
| 460 /* | |
| 461 * This is the call which starts the GUI. | |
| 462 */ | |
| 463 void | |
| 464 gui_init() | |
| 465 { | |
| 466 win_T *wp; | |
| 467 static int recursive = 0; | |
| 468 | |
| 469 /* | |
| 470 * It's possible to use ":gui" in a .gvimrc file. The first halve of this | |
| 471 * function will then be executed at the first call, the rest by the | |
| 472 * recursive call. This allow the shell to be opened halfway reading a | |
| 473 * gvimrc file. | |
| 474 */ | |
| 475 if (!recursive) | |
| 476 { | |
| 477 ++recursive; | |
| 478 | |
| 479 clip_init(TRUE); | |
| 480 | |
| 481 /* If can't initialize, don't try doing the rest */ | |
| 482 if (gui_init_check() == FAIL) | |
| 483 { | |
| 484 --recursive; | |
| 485 clip_init(FALSE); | |
| 486 return; | |
| 487 } | |
| 488 | |
| 489 /* | |
| 147 | 490 * Reset 'paste'. It's useful in the terminal, but not in the GUI. It |
| 491 * breaks the Paste toolbar button. | |
| 492 */ | |
| 493 set_option_value((char_u *)"paste", 0L, NULL, 0); | |
| 494 | |
| 495 /* | |
| 7 | 496 * Set up system-wide default menus. |
| 497 */ | |
| 498 #if defined(SYS_MENU_FILE) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
| 499 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_NOSYSMENU) == NULL) | |
| 500 { | |
| 501 sys_menu = TRUE; | |
| 819 | 502 do_source((char_u *)SYS_MENU_FILE, FALSE, DOSO_NONE); |
| 7 | 503 sys_menu = FALSE; |
| 504 } | |
| 505 #endif | |
| 506 | |
| 507 /* | |
| 508 * Switch on the mouse by default, unless the user changed it already. | |
| 509 * This can then be changed in the .gvimrc. | |
| 510 */ | |
| 511 if (!option_was_set((char_u *)"mouse")) | |
| 512 set_string_option_direct((char_u *)"mouse", -1, | |
| 694 | 513 (char_u *)"a", OPT_FREE, SID_NONE); |
| 7 | 514 |
| 515 /* | |
| 516 * If -U option given, use only the initializations from that file and | |
| 517 * nothing else. Skip all initializations for "-U NONE" or "-u NORC". | |
| 518 */ | |
| 519 if (use_gvimrc != NULL) | |
| 520 { | |
| 521 if (STRCMP(use_gvimrc, "NONE") != 0 | |
| 522 && STRCMP(use_gvimrc, "NORC") != 0 | |
| 819 | 523 && do_source(use_gvimrc, FALSE, DOSO_NONE) != OK) |
| 7 | 524 EMSG2(_("E230: Cannot read from \"%s\""), use_gvimrc); |
| 525 } | |
| 526 else | |
| 527 { | |
| 528 /* | |
| 529 * Get system wide defaults for gvim, only when file name defined. | |
| 530 */ | |
| 531 #ifdef SYS_GVIMRC_FILE | |
| 819 | 532 do_source((char_u *)SYS_GVIMRC_FILE, FALSE, DOSO_NONE); |
| 7 | 533 #endif |
| 534 | |
| 535 /* | |
| 536 * Try to read GUI initialization commands from the following | |
| 537 * places: | |
| 538 * - environment variable GVIMINIT | |
| 539 * - the user gvimrc file (~/.gvimrc) | |
| 540 * - the second user gvimrc file ($VIM/.gvimrc for Dos) | |
| 541 * - the third user gvimrc file ($VIM/.gvimrc for Amiga) | |
| 542 * The first that exists is used, the rest is ignored. | |
| 543 */ | |
| 544 if (process_env((char_u *)"GVIMINIT", FALSE) == FAIL | |
| 819 | 545 && do_source((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE, TRUE, |
| 546 DOSO_GVIMRC) == FAIL | |
| 7 | 547 #ifdef USR_GVIMRC_FILE2 |
| 819 | 548 && do_source((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE2, TRUE, |
| 549 DOSO_GVIMRC) == FAIL | |
| 7 | 550 #endif |
|
4863
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
551 #ifdef USR_GVIMRC_FILE3 |
|
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
552 && do_source((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE3, TRUE, |
|
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
553 DOSO_GVIMRC) == FAIL |
|
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
554 #endif |
| 7 | 555 ) |
| 556 { | |
|
4863
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
557 #ifdef USR_GVIMRC_FILE4 |
|
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
558 (void)do_source((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE4, TRUE, DOSO_GVIMRC); |
| 7 | 559 #endif |
| 560 } | |
| 561 | |
| 562 /* | |
| 563 * Read initialization commands from ".gvimrc" in current | |
| 564 * directory. This is only done if the 'exrc' option is set. | |
| 565 * Because of security reasons we disallow shell and write | |
| 566 * commands now, except for unix if the file is owned by the user | |
| 567 * or 'secure' option has been reset in environment of global | |
| 568 * ".gvimrc". | |
| 569 * Only do this if GVIMRC_FILE is not the same as USR_GVIMRC_FILE, | |
| 570 * USR_GVIMRC_FILE2, USR_GVIMRC_FILE3 or SYS_GVIMRC_FILE. | |
| 571 */ | |
| 572 if (p_exrc) | |
| 573 { | |
| 574 #ifdef UNIX | |
| 575 { | |
| 576 struct stat s; | |
| 577 | |
| 578 /* if ".gvimrc" file is not owned by user, set 'secure' | |
| 579 * mode */ | |
| 580 if (mch_stat(GVIMRC_FILE, &s) || s.st_uid != getuid()) | |
| 581 secure = p_secure; | |
| 582 } | |
| 583 #else | |
| 584 secure = p_secure; | |
| 585 #endif | |
| 586 | |
| 587 if ( fullpathcmp((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE, | |
| 588 (char_u *)GVIMRC_FILE, FALSE) != FPC_SAME | |
| 589 #ifdef SYS_GVIMRC_FILE | |
| 590 && fullpathcmp((char_u *)SYS_GVIMRC_FILE, | |
| 591 (char_u *)GVIMRC_FILE, FALSE) != FPC_SAME | |
| 592 #endif | |
| 593 #ifdef USR_GVIMRC_FILE2 | |
| 594 && fullpathcmp((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE2, | |
| 595 (char_u *)GVIMRC_FILE, FALSE) != FPC_SAME | |
| 596 #endif | |
| 597 #ifdef USR_GVIMRC_FILE3 | |
| 598 && fullpathcmp((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE3, | |
| 599 (char_u *)GVIMRC_FILE, FALSE) != FPC_SAME | |
| 600 #endif | |
|
4863
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
601 #ifdef USR_GVIMRC_FILE4 |
|
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
602 && fullpathcmp((char_u *)USR_GVIMRC_FILE4, |
|
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
603 (char_u *)GVIMRC_FILE, FALSE) != FPC_SAME |
|
c4d4f0fc12b9
updated for version 7.3.1178
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4805
diff
changeset
|
604 #endif |
| 7 | 605 ) |
| 819 | 606 do_source((char_u *)GVIMRC_FILE, TRUE, DOSO_GVIMRC); |
| 7 | 607 |
| 608 if (secure == 2) | |
| 609 need_wait_return = TRUE; | |
| 610 secure = 0; | |
| 611 } | |
| 612 } | |
| 613 | |
| 614 if (need_wait_return || msg_didany) | |
| 615 wait_return(TRUE); | |
| 616 | |
| 617 --recursive; | |
| 618 } | |
| 619 | |
| 620 /* If recursive call opened the shell, return here from the first call */ | |
| 621 if (gui.in_use) | |
| 622 return; | |
| 623 | |
| 624 /* | |
| 625 * Create the GUI shell. | |
| 626 */ | |
| 627 gui.in_use = TRUE; /* Must be set after menus have been set up */ | |
| 628 if (gui_mch_init() == FAIL) | |
| 629 goto error; | |
| 630 | |
| 631 /* Avoid a delay for an error message that was printed in the terminal | |
| 632 * where Vim was started. */ | |
| 633 emsg_on_display = FALSE; | |
| 634 msg_scrolled = 0; | |
| 446 | 635 clear_sb_text(); |
| 7 | 636 need_wait_return = FALSE; |
| 637 msg_didany = FALSE; | |
| 638 | |
| 639 /* | |
| 640 * Check validity of any generic resources that may have been loaded. | |
| 641 */ | |
| 642 if (gui.border_width < 0) | |
| 643 gui.border_width = 0; | |
| 644 | |
| 645 /* | |
| 646 * Set up the fonts. First use a font specified with "-fn" or "-font". | |
| 647 */ | |
| 648 if (font_argument != NULL) | |
| 649 set_option_value((char_u *)"gfn", 0L, (char_u *)font_argument, 0); | |
| 650 if ( | |
| 651 #ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 652 (*p_guifontset == NUL | |
| 653 || gui_init_font(p_guifontset, TRUE) == FAIL) && | |
| 654 #endif | |
| 655 gui_init_font(*p_guifont == NUL ? hl_get_font_name() | |
| 656 : p_guifont, FALSE) == FAIL) | |
| 657 { | |
| 658 EMSG(_("E665: Cannot start GUI, no valid font found")); | |
| 659 goto error2; | |
| 660 } | |
| 661 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 662 if (gui_get_wide_font() == FAIL) | |
| 663 EMSG(_("E231: 'guifontwide' invalid")); | |
| 664 #endif | |
| 665 | |
| 666 gui.num_cols = Columns; | |
| 667 gui.num_rows = Rows; | |
| 668 gui_reset_scroll_region(); | |
| 669 | |
| 670 /* Create initial scrollbars */ | |
| 671 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) | |
| 672 { | |
| 673 gui_create_scrollbar(&wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT], SBAR_LEFT, wp); | |
| 674 gui_create_scrollbar(&wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT], SBAR_RIGHT, wp); | |
| 675 } | |
| 676 gui_create_scrollbar(&gui.bottom_sbar, SBAR_BOTTOM, NULL); | |
| 677 | |
| 678 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 679 gui_create_initial_menus(root_menu); | |
| 680 #endif | |
| 681 #ifdef FEAT_SUN_WORKSHOP | |
| 682 if (usingSunWorkShop) | |
| 683 workshop_init(); | |
| 684 #endif | |
| 685 #ifdef FEAT_SIGN_ICONS | |
| 686 sign_gui_started(); | |
| 687 #endif | |
| 688 | |
| 689 /* Configure the desired menu and scrollbars */ | |
| 690 gui_init_which_components(NULL); | |
| 691 | |
| 692 /* All components of the GUI have been created now */ | |
| 693 gui.shell_created = TRUE; | |
| 694 | |
| 695 #ifndef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 696 /* Set the shell size, adjusted for the screen size. For GTK this only | |
| 697 * works after the shell has been opened, thus it is further down. */ | |
| 811 | 698 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, TRUE, RESIZE_BOTH); |
| 7 | 699 #endif |
| 700 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
| 701 /* Need to set the size of the menubar after all the menus have been | |
| 702 * created. */ | |
| 703 gui_mch_compute_menu_height((Widget)0); | |
| 704 #endif | |
| 705 | |
| 706 /* | |
| 707 * Actually open the GUI shell. | |
| 708 */ | |
| 709 if (gui_mch_open() != FAIL) | |
| 710 { | |
| 711 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE | |
| 712 maketitle(); | |
| 713 resettitle(); | |
| 714 #endif | |
| 715 init_gui_options(); | |
| 716 #ifdef FEAT_ARABIC | |
| 717 /* Our GUI can't do bidi. */ | |
| 718 p_tbidi = FALSE; | |
| 719 #endif | |
| 574 | 720 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 721 /* Give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place. */ |
| 722 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 827 | 723 |
| 724 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 725 /* If there is no 'm' in 'guioptions' we need to remove the menu now. | |
| 726 * It was still there to make F10 work. */ | |
| 727 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL) | |
| 728 { | |
| 729 --gui.starting; | |
| 730 gui_mch_enable_menu(FALSE); | |
| 731 ++gui.starting; | |
| 732 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 733 } | |
| 734 # endif | |
| 735 | |
| 7 | 736 /* Now make sure the shell fits on the screen. */ |
| 811 | 737 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, TRUE, RESIZE_BOTH); |
| 7 | 738 #endif |
| 261 | 739 /* When 'lines' was set while starting up the topframe may have to be |
| 740 * resized. */ | |
| 741 win_new_shellsize(); | |
| 187 | 742 |
| 743 #ifdef FEAT_BEVAL | |
| 744 /* Always create the Balloon Evaluation area, but disable it when | |
| 745 * 'ballooneval' is off */ | |
| 746 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 747 balloonEval = gui_mch_create_beval_area(gui.drawarea, NULL, | |
| 748 &general_beval_cb, NULL); | |
| 749 # else | |
| 216 | 750 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) || defined(FEAT_GUI_ATHENA) |
| 187 | 751 { |
| 752 extern Widget textArea; | |
| 753 balloonEval = gui_mch_create_beval_area(textArea, NULL, | |
| 216 | 754 &general_beval_cb, NULL); |
| 187 | 755 } |
| 756 # else | |
| 757 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_W32 | |
| 758 balloonEval = gui_mch_create_beval_area(NULL, NULL, | |
| 759 &general_beval_cb, NULL); | |
| 760 # endif | |
| 761 # endif | |
| 762 # endif | |
| 763 if (!p_beval) | |
| 764 gui_mch_disable_beval_area(balloonEval); | |
| 765 #endif | |
| 766 | |
| 7 | 767 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 768 if (!im_xim_isvalid_imactivate()) | |
| 769 EMSG(_("E599: Value of 'imactivatekey' is invalid")); | |
| 770 #endif | |
| 37 | 771 /* When 'cmdheight' was set during startup it may not have taken |
| 772 * effect yet. */ | |
| 773 if (p_ch != 1L) | |
| 824 | 774 command_height(); |
| 7 | 775 |
| 776 return; | |
| 777 } | |
| 778 | |
| 779 error2: | |
| 780 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_X11 | |
| 781 /* undo gui_mch_init() */ | |
| 782 gui_mch_uninit(); | |
| 783 #endif | |
| 784 | |
| 785 error: | |
| 786 gui.in_use = FALSE; | |
| 787 clip_init(FALSE); | |
| 788 } | |
| 789 | |
| 790 | |
| 791 void | |
| 792 gui_exit(rc) | |
| 793 int rc; | |
| 794 { | |
| 795 /* don't free the fonts, it leads to a BUS error | |
| 796 * richard@whitequeen.com Jul 99 */ | |
| 797 free_highlight_fonts(); | |
| 798 gui.in_use = FALSE; | |
| 799 gui_mch_exit(rc); | |
| 800 } | |
| 801 | |
| 574 | 802 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) || defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) \ |
| 7 | 803 || defined(FEAT_GUI_PHOTON) || defined(FEAT_GUI_MAC) || defined(PROTO) |
| 1002 | 804 # define NEED_GUI_UPDATE_SCREEN 1 |
| 7 | 805 /* |
| 806 * Called when the GUI shell is closed by the user. If there are no changed | |
| 807 * files Vim exits, otherwise there will be a dialog to ask the user what to | |
| 808 * do. | |
| 809 * When this function returns, Vim should NOT exit! | |
| 810 */ | |
| 811 void | |
| 812 gui_shell_closed() | |
| 813 { | |
| 814 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod; | |
| 815 | |
| 816 save_cmdmod = cmdmod; | |
| 817 | |
| 818 /* Only exit when there are no changed files */ | |
| 819 exiting = TRUE; | |
| 820 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE | |
| 821 cmdmod.browse = TRUE; | |
| 822 # endif | |
| 823 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG) | |
| 824 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE; | |
| 825 # endif | |
| 826 /* If there are changed buffers, present the user with a dialog if | |
| 827 * possible, otherwise give an error message. */ | |
| 828 if (!check_changed_any(FALSE)) | |
| 829 getout(0); | |
| 830 | |
| 831 exiting = FALSE; | |
| 832 cmdmod = save_cmdmod; | |
| 1002 | 833 gui_update_screen(); /* redraw, window may show changed buffer */ |
| 7 | 834 } |
| 835 #endif | |
| 836 | |
| 837 /* | |
| 4352 | 838 * Set the font. "font_list" is a comma separated list of font names. The |
| 7 | 839 * first font name that works is used. If none is found, use the default |
| 840 * font. | |
| 841 * If "fontset" is TRUE, the "font_list" is used as one name for the fontset. | |
| 842 * Return OK when able to set the font. When it failed FAIL is returned and | |
| 843 * the fonts are unchanged. | |
| 844 */ | |
| 845 int | |
| 846 gui_init_font(font_list, fontset) | |
| 847 char_u *font_list; | |
| 1884 | 848 int fontset UNUSED; |
| 7 | 849 { |
| 850 #define FONTLEN 320 | |
| 851 char_u font_name[FONTLEN]; | |
| 852 int font_list_empty = FALSE; | |
| 853 int ret = FAIL; | |
| 854 | |
| 855 if (!gui.in_use) | |
| 856 return FAIL; | |
| 857 | |
| 858 font_name[0] = NUL; | |
| 859 if (*font_list == NUL) | |
| 860 font_list_empty = TRUE; | |
| 861 else | |
| 862 { | |
| 863 #ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 864 /* When using a fontset, the whole list of fonts is one name. */ | |
| 865 if (fontset) | |
| 866 ret = gui_mch_init_font(font_list, TRUE); | |
| 867 else | |
| 868 #endif | |
| 869 while (*font_list != NUL) | |
| 870 { | |
| 871 /* Isolate one comma separated font name. */ | |
| 872 (void)copy_option_part(&font_list, font_name, FONTLEN, ","); | |
| 873 | |
| 874 /* Careful!!! The Win32 version of gui_mch_init_font(), when | |
| 875 * called with "*" will change p_guifont to the selected font | |
| 876 * name, which frees the old value. This makes font_list | |
| 877 * invalid. Thus when OK is returned here, font_list must no | |
| 878 * longer be used! */ | |
| 879 if (gui_mch_init_font(font_name, FALSE) == OK) | |
| 880 { | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
881 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 882 /* If it's a Unicode font, try setting 'guifontwide' to a |
| 883 * similar double-width font. */ | |
| 884 if ((p_guifontwide == NULL || *p_guifontwide == NUL) | |
| 885 && strstr((char *)font_name, "10646") != NULL) | |
| 886 set_guifontwide(font_name); | |
| 887 #endif | |
| 888 ret = OK; | |
| 889 break; | |
| 890 } | |
| 891 } | |
| 892 } | |
| 893 | |
| 894 if (ret != OK | |
| 895 && STRCMP(font_list, "*") != 0 | |
| 896 && (font_list_empty || gui.norm_font == NOFONT)) | |
| 897 { | |
| 898 /* | |
| 899 * Couldn't load any font in 'font_list', keep the current font if | |
| 900 * there is one. If 'font_list' is empty, or if there is no current | |
| 901 * font, tell gui_mch_init_font() to try to find a font we can load. | |
| 902 */ | |
| 903 ret = gui_mch_init_font(NULL, FALSE); | |
| 904 } | |
| 905 | |
| 906 if (ret == OK) | |
| 907 { | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
908 #ifndef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 909 /* Set normal font as current font */ |
| 910 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 911 if (gui.fontset != NOFONTSET) | |
| 912 gui_mch_set_fontset(gui.fontset); | |
| 913 else | |
| 914 # endif | |
| 915 gui_mch_set_font(gui.norm_font); | |
| 916 #endif | |
| 3923 | 917 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, TRUE, RESIZE_BOTH); |
| 7 | 918 } |
| 919 | |
| 920 return ret; | |
| 921 } | |
| 922 | |
| 923 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
924 # ifndef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 925 /* |
| 926 * Try setting 'guifontwide' to a font twice as wide as "name". | |
| 927 */ | |
| 928 static void | |
| 929 set_guifontwide(name) | |
| 930 char_u *name; | |
| 931 { | |
| 932 int i = 0; | |
| 933 char_u wide_name[FONTLEN + 10]; /* room for 2 * width and '*' */ | |
| 934 char_u *wp = NULL; | |
| 935 char_u *p; | |
| 936 GuiFont font; | |
| 937 | |
| 938 wp = wide_name; | |
| 939 for (p = name; *p != NUL; ++p) | |
| 940 { | |
| 941 *wp++ = *p; | |
| 942 if (*p == '-') | |
| 943 { | |
| 944 ++i; | |
| 945 if (i == 6) /* font type: change "--" to "-*-" */ | |
| 946 { | |
| 947 if (p[1] == '-') | |
| 948 *wp++ = '*'; | |
| 949 } | |
| 950 else if (i == 12) /* found the width */ | |
| 951 { | |
| 952 ++p; | |
| 953 i = getdigits(&p); | |
| 954 if (i != 0) | |
| 955 { | |
| 956 /* Double the width specification. */ | |
| 957 sprintf((char *)wp, "%d%s", i * 2, p); | |
| 958 font = gui_mch_get_font(wide_name, FALSE); | |
| 959 if (font != NOFONT) | |
| 960 { | |
| 37 | 961 gui_mch_free_font(gui.wide_font); |
| 7 | 962 gui.wide_font = font; |
| 963 set_string_option_direct((char_u *)"gfw", -1, | |
| 694 | 964 wide_name, OPT_FREE, 0); |
| 7 | 965 } |
| 966 } | |
| 967 break; | |
| 968 } | |
| 969 } | |
| 970 } | |
| 971 } | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
972 # endif /* !FEAT_GUI_GTK */ |
| 7 | 973 |
| 974 /* | |
| 975 * Get the font for 'guifontwide'. | |
| 976 * Return FAIL for an invalid font name. | |
| 977 */ | |
| 978 int | |
| 979 gui_get_wide_font() | |
| 980 { | |
| 981 GuiFont font = NOFONT; | |
| 982 char_u font_name[FONTLEN]; | |
| 983 char_u *p; | |
| 984 | |
| 985 if (!gui.in_use) /* Can't allocate font yet, assume it's OK. */ | |
| 986 return OK; /* Will give an error message later. */ | |
| 987 | |
| 988 if (p_guifontwide != NULL && *p_guifontwide != NUL) | |
| 989 { | |
| 990 for (p = p_guifontwide; *p != NUL; ) | |
| 991 { | |
| 992 /* Isolate one comma separated font name. */ | |
| 993 (void)copy_option_part(&p, font_name, FONTLEN, ","); | |
| 994 font = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE); | |
| 995 if (font != NOFONT) | |
| 996 break; | |
| 997 } | |
| 998 if (font == NOFONT) | |
| 999 return FAIL; | |
| 1000 } | |
| 1001 | |
| 1002 gui_mch_free_font(gui.wide_font); | |
| 4250 | 1003 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 1004 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */ |
| 1005 if (font != NOFONT && gui.norm_font != NOFONT | |
| 1006 && pango_font_description_equal(font, gui.norm_font)) | |
| 1007 { | |
| 1008 gui.wide_font = NOFONT; | |
| 1009 gui_mch_free_font(font); | |
| 1010 } | |
| 1011 else | |
| 4250 | 1012 # endif |
| 7 | 1013 gui.wide_font = font; |
| 4250 | 1014 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_MSWIN |
| 4055 | 1015 gui_mch_wide_font_changed(); |
|
4950
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
1016 # else |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
1017 /* |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
1018 * TODO: setup wide_bold_font, wide_ital_font and wide_boldital_font to |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
1019 * support those fonts for 'guifontwide'. |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
1020 */ |
| 4250 | 1021 # endif |
| 7 | 1022 return OK; |
| 1023 } | |
| 1024 #endif | |
| 1025 | |
| 1026 void | |
| 1027 gui_set_cursor(row, col) | |
| 1028 int row; | |
| 1029 int col; | |
| 1030 { | |
| 1031 gui.row = row; | |
| 1032 gui.col = col; | |
| 1033 } | |
| 1034 | |
| 1035 /* | |
| 1036 * gui_check_pos - check if the cursor is on the screen. | |
| 1037 */ | |
| 1038 static void | |
| 1039 gui_check_pos() | |
| 1040 { | |
| 1041 if (gui.row >= screen_Rows) | |
| 1042 gui.row = screen_Rows - 1; | |
| 1043 if (gui.col >= screen_Columns) | |
| 1044 gui.col = screen_Columns - 1; | |
| 1045 if (gui.cursor_row >= screen_Rows || gui.cursor_col >= screen_Columns) | |
| 1046 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 1047 } | |
| 1048 | |
| 1049 /* | |
| 1050 * Redraw the cursor if necessary or when forced. | |
| 1051 * Careful: The contents of ScreenLines[] must match what is on the screen, | |
| 1052 * otherwise this goes wrong. May need to call out_flush() first. | |
| 1053 */ | |
| 1054 void | |
| 1055 gui_update_cursor(force, clear_selection) | |
| 1056 int force; /* when TRUE, update even when not moved */ | |
| 1057 int clear_selection;/* clear selection under cursor */ | |
| 1058 { | |
| 1059 int cur_width = 0; | |
| 1060 int cur_height = 0; | |
| 1061 int old_hl_mask; | |
| 1062 int idx; | |
| 1063 int id; | |
| 1064 guicolor_T cfg, cbg, cc; /* cursor fore-/background color */ | |
| 1065 int cattr; /* cursor attributes */ | |
| 1066 int attr; | |
| 1067 attrentry_T *aep = NULL; | |
| 1068 | |
| 1695 | 1069 /* Don't update the cursor when halfway busy scrolling or the screen size |
| 1070 * doesn't match 'columns' and 'lines. ScreenLines[] isn't valid then. */ | |
| 1071 if (!can_update_cursor || screen_Columns != gui.num_cols | |
| 1072 || screen_Rows != gui.num_rows) | |
| 7 | 1073 return; |
| 1074 | |
| 1075 gui_check_pos(); | |
| 1076 if (!gui.cursor_is_valid || force | |
| 1077 || gui.row != gui.cursor_row || gui.col != gui.cursor_col) | |
| 1078 { | |
| 1079 gui_undraw_cursor(); | |
| 1080 if (gui.row < 0) | |
| 1081 return; | |
| 1082 #ifdef USE_IM_CONTROL | |
| 1083 if (gui.row != gui.cursor_row || gui.col != gui.cursor_col) | |
| 1084 im_set_position(gui.row, gui.col); | |
| 1085 #endif | |
| 1086 gui.cursor_row = gui.row; | |
| 1087 gui.cursor_col = gui.col; | |
| 1088 | |
| 1089 /* Only write to the screen after ScreenLines[] has been initialized */ | |
| 1090 if (!screen_cleared || ScreenLines == NULL) | |
| 1091 return; | |
| 1092 | |
| 1093 /* Clear the selection if we are about to write over it */ | |
| 1094 if (clear_selection) | |
| 1095 clip_may_clear_selection(gui.row, gui.row); | |
| 1096 /* Check that the cursor is inside the shell (resizing may have made | |
| 1097 * it invalid) */ | |
| 1098 if (gui.row >= screen_Rows || gui.col >= screen_Columns) | |
| 1099 return; | |
| 1100 | |
| 1101 gui.cursor_is_valid = TRUE; | |
| 1102 | |
| 1103 /* | |
| 1104 * How the cursor is drawn depends on the current mode. | |
| 1105 */ | |
| 1106 idx = get_shape_idx(FALSE); | |
| 1107 if (State & LANGMAP) | |
| 1108 id = shape_table[idx].id_lm; | |
| 1109 else | |
| 1110 id = shape_table[idx].id; | |
| 1111 | |
| 1112 /* get the colors and attributes for the cursor. Default is inverted */ | |
| 1113 cfg = INVALCOLOR; | |
| 1114 cbg = INVALCOLOR; | |
| 1115 cattr = HL_INVERSE; | |
| 1116 gui_mch_set_blinking(shape_table[idx].blinkwait, | |
| 1117 shape_table[idx].blinkon, | |
| 1118 shape_table[idx].blinkoff); | |
| 1119 if (id > 0) | |
| 1120 { | |
| 1121 cattr = syn_id2colors(id, &cfg, &cbg); | |
| 1122 #if defined(USE_IM_CONTROL) || defined(FEAT_HANGULIN) | |
| 1123 { | |
| 1124 static int iid; | |
| 1125 guicolor_T fg, bg; | |
| 1126 | |
| 1668 | 1127 if ( |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1128 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(FEAT_HANGULIN) |
| 1668 | 1129 preedit_get_status() |
| 1130 # else | |
| 1131 im_get_status() | |
| 1132 # endif | |
| 1133 ) | |
| 7 | 1134 { |
| 1135 iid = syn_name2id((char_u *)"CursorIM"); | |
| 1136 if (iid > 0) | |
| 1137 { | |
| 1138 syn_id2colors(iid, &fg, &bg); | |
| 1139 if (bg != INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1140 cbg = bg; | |
| 1141 if (fg != INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1142 cfg = fg; | |
| 1143 } | |
| 1144 } | |
| 1145 } | |
| 1146 #endif | |
| 1147 } | |
| 1148 | |
| 1149 /* | |
| 1150 * Get the attributes for the character under the cursor. | |
| 1151 * When no cursor color was given, use the character color. | |
| 1152 */ | |
| 1153 attr = ScreenAttrs[LineOffset[gui.row] + gui.col]; | |
| 1154 if (attr > HL_ALL) | |
| 1155 aep = syn_gui_attr2entry(attr); | |
| 1156 if (aep != NULL) | |
| 1157 { | |
| 1158 attr = aep->ae_attr; | |
| 1159 if (cfg == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1160 cfg = ((attr & HL_INVERSE) ? aep->ae_u.gui.bg_color | |
| 1161 : aep->ae_u.gui.fg_color); | |
| 1162 if (cbg == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1163 cbg = ((attr & HL_INVERSE) ? aep->ae_u.gui.fg_color | |
| 1164 : aep->ae_u.gui.bg_color); | |
| 1165 } | |
| 1166 if (cfg == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1167 cfg = (attr & HL_INVERSE) ? gui.back_pixel : gui.norm_pixel; | |
| 1168 if (cbg == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1169 cbg = (attr & HL_INVERSE) ? gui.norm_pixel : gui.back_pixel; | |
| 1170 | |
| 1171 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 1172 if (aep != NULL) | |
| 1173 { | |
| 1174 xim_bg_color = ((attr & HL_INVERSE) ? aep->ae_u.gui.fg_color | |
| 1175 : aep->ae_u.gui.bg_color); | |
| 1176 xim_fg_color = ((attr & HL_INVERSE) ? aep->ae_u.gui.bg_color | |
| 1177 : aep->ae_u.gui.fg_color); | |
| 1178 if (xim_bg_color == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1179 xim_bg_color = (attr & HL_INVERSE) ? gui.norm_pixel | |
| 1180 : gui.back_pixel; | |
| 1181 if (xim_fg_color == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 1182 xim_fg_color = (attr & HL_INVERSE) ? gui.back_pixel | |
| 1183 : gui.norm_pixel; | |
| 1184 } | |
| 1185 else | |
| 1186 { | |
| 1187 xim_bg_color = (attr & HL_INVERSE) ? gui.norm_pixel | |
| 1188 : gui.back_pixel; | |
| 1189 xim_fg_color = (attr & HL_INVERSE) ? gui.back_pixel | |
| 1190 : gui.norm_pixel; | |
| 1191 } | |
| 1192 #endif | |
| 1193 | |
| 1194 attr &= ~HL_INVERSE; | |
| 1195 if (cattr & HL_INVERSE) | |
| 1196 { | |
| 1197 cc = cbg; | |
| 1198 cbg = cfg; | |
| 1199 cfg = cc; | |
| 1200 } | |
| 1201 cattr &= ~HL_INVERSE; | |
| 1202 | |
| 1203 /* | |
| 1204 * When we don't have window focus, draw a hollow cursor. | |
| 1205 */ | |
| 1206 if (!gui.in_focus) | |
| 1207 { | |
| 1208 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(cbg); | |
| 1209 return; | |
| 1210 } | |
| 1211 | |
| 1212 old_hl_mask = gui.highlight_mask; | |
| 1213 if (shape_table[idx].shape == SHAPE_BLOCK | |
| 1214 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 1215 || composing_hangul | |
| 1216 #endif | |
| 1217 ) | |
| 1218 { | |
| 1219 /* | |
| 1220 * Draw the text character with the cursor colors. Use the | |
| 1221 * character attributes plus the cursor attributes. | |
| 1222 */ | |
| 1223 gui.highlight_mask = (cattr | attr); | |
| 1224 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 1225 if (composing_hangul) | |
| 1226 (void)gui_outstr_nowrap(composing_hangul_buffer, 2, | |
| 1227 GUI_MON_IS_CURSOR | GUI_MON_NOCLEAR, cfg, cbg, 0); | |
| 1228 else | |
| 1229 #endif | |
| 1230 (void)gui_screenchar(LineOffset[gui.row] + gui.col, | |
| 1231 GUI_MON_IS_CURSOR | GUI_MON_NOCLEAR, cfg, cbg, 0); | |
| 1232 } | |
| 1233 else | |
| 1234 { | |
| 1235 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(FEAT_RIGHTLEFT) | |
| 1236 int col_off = FALSE; | |
| 1237 #endif | |
| 1238 /* | |
| 1239 * First draw the partial cursor, then overwrite with the text | |
| 1240 * character, using a transparent background. | |
| 1241 */ | |
| 1242 if (shape_table[idx].shape == SHAPE_VER) | |
| 1243 { | |
| 1244 cur_height = gui.char_height; | |
| 1245 cur_width = (gui.char_width * shape_table[idx].percentage | |
| 1246 + 99) / 100; | |
| 1247 } | |
| 1248 else | |
| 1249 { | |
| 1250 cur_height = (gui.char_height * shape_table[idx].percentage | |
| 1251 + 99) / 100; | |
| 1252 cur_width = gui.char_width; | |
| 1253 } | |
| 1254 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 1378 | 1255 if (has_mbyte && (*mb_off2cells)(LineOffset[gui.row] + gui.col, |
| 1256 LineOffset[gui.row] + screen_Columns) > 1) | |
| 7 | 1257 { |
| 1258 /* Double wide character. */ | |
| 1259 if (shape_table[idx].shape != SHAPE_VER) | |
| 1260 cur_width += gui.char_width; | |
| 1261 # ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT | |
| 1262 if (CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT) | |
| 1263 { | |
| 1264 /* gui.col points to the left halve of the character but | |
| 1265 * the vertical line needs to be on the right halve. | |
| 1266 * A double-wide horizontal line is also drawn from the | |
| 1267 * right halve in gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(). */ | |
| 1268 col_off = TRUE; | |
| 1269 ++gui.col; | |
| 1270 } | |
| 1271 # endif | |
| 1272 } | |
| 1273 #endif | |
| 1274 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(cur_width, cur_height, cbg); | |
| 1275 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(FEAT_RIGHTLEFT) | |
| 1276 if (col_off) | |
| 1277 --gui.col; | |
| 1278 #endif | |
| 1279 | |
| 1280 #ifndef FEAT_GUI_MSWIN /* doesn't seem to work for MSWindows */ | |
| 1281 gui.highlight_mask = ScreenAttrs[LineOffset[gui.row] + gui.col]; | |
| 1282 (void)gui_screenchar(LineOffset[gui.row] + gui.col, | |
| 1283 GUI_MON_TRS_CURSOR | GUI_MON_NOCLEAR, | |
| 1284 (guicolor_T)0, (guicolor_T)0, 0); | |
| 1285 #endif | |
| 1286 } | |
| 1287 gui.highlight_mask = old_hl_mask; | |
| 1288 } | |
| 1289 } | |
| 1290 | |
| 1291 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 1292 void | |
| 1293 gui_position_menu() | |
| 1294 { | |
| 574 | 1295 # if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) |
| 7 | 1296 if (gui.menu_is_active && gui.in_use) |
| 1297 gui_mch_set_menu_pos(0, 0, gui.menu_width, gui.menu_height); | |
| 1298 # endif | |
| 1299 } | |
| 1300 #endif | |
| 1301 | |
| 1302 /* | |
| 1303 * Position the various GUI components (text area, menu). The vertical | |
| 1304 * scrollbars are NOT handled here. See gui_update_scrollbars(). | |
| 1305 */ | |
| 1306 static void | |
| 1307 gui_position_components(total_width) | |
| 1884 | 1308 int total_width UNUSED; |
| 7 | 1309 { |
| 1310 int text_area_x; | |
| 1311 int text_area_y; | |
| 1312 int text_area_width; | |
| 1313 int text_area_height; | |
| 1314 | |
| 1315 /* avoid that moving components around generates events */ | |
| 1316 ++hold_gui_events; | |
| 1317 | |
| 1318 text_area_x = 0; | |
| 1319 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]) | |
| 1320 text_area_x += gui.scrollbar_width; | |
| 1321 | |
| 1322 text_area_y = 0; | |
| 1323 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) && !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_PHOTON)) | |
| 1324 gui.menu_width = total_width; | |
| 1325 if (gui.menu_is_active) | |
| 1326 text_area_y += gui.menu_height; | |
| 1327 #endif | |
| 1328 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) && defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) | |
| 1329 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL) | |
| 1330 text_area_y = TOOLBAR_BUTTON_HEIGHT + TOOLBAR_BORDER_HEIGHT; | |
| 1331 #endif | |
| 1332 | |
| 819 | 1333 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) && (defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) \ |
| 1378 | 1334 || defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) || defined(FEAT_GUI_MAC)) |
| 810 | 1335 if (gui_has_tabline()) |
| 843 | 1336 text_area_y += gui.tabline_height; |
| 810 | 1337 #endif |
| 1338 | |
| 7 | 1339 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) && (defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) || defined(FEAT_GUI_ATHENA)) |
| 1340 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL) | |
| 1341 { | |
| 1342 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_ATHENA | |
| 1343 gui_mch_set_toolbar_pos(0, text_area_y, | |
| 1344 gui.menu_width, gui.toolbar_height); | |
| 1345 # endif | |
| 1346 text_area_y += gui.toolbar_height; | |
| 1347 } | |
| 1348 #endif | |
| 1349 | |
| 1350 text_area_width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width + gui.border_offset * 2; | |
| 1351 text_area_height = gui.num_rows * gui.char_height + gui.border_offset * 2; | |
| 1352 | |
| 1353 gui_mch_set_text_area_pos(text_area_x, | |
| 1354 text_area_y, | |
| 1355 text_area_width, | |
| 1356 text_area_height | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1357 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 1358 + xim_get_status_area_height() |
| 1359 #endif | |
| 1360 ); | |
| 1361 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 1362 gui_position_menu(); | |
| 1363 #endif | |
| 1364 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_BOTTOM]) | |
| 1365 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_pos(&gui.bottom_sbar, | |
| 1366 text_area_x, | |
| 1367 text_area_y + text_area_height, | |
| 1368 text_area_width, | |
| 1369 gui.scrollbar_height); | |
| 1370 gui.left_sbar_x = 0; | |
| 1371 gui.right_sbar_x = text_area_x + text_area_width; | |
| 1372 | |
| 1373 --hold_gui_events; | |
| 1374 } | |
| 1375 | |
| 444 | 1376 /* |
| 1377 * Get the width of the widgets and decorations to the side of the text area. | |
| 1378 */ | |
| 7 | 1379 int |
| 1380 gui_get_base_width() | |
| 1381 { | |
| 1382 int base_width; | |
| 1383 | |
| 1384 base_width = 2 * gui.border_offset; | |
| 1385 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]) | |
| 1386 base_width += gui.scrollbar_width; | |
| 1387 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT]) | |
| 1388 base_width += gui.scrollbar_width; | |
| 1389 return base_width; | |
| 1390 } | |
| 1391 | |
| 444 | 1392 /* |
| 1393 * Get the height of the widgets and decorations above and below the text area. | |
| 1394 */ | |
| 7 | 1395 int |
| 1396 gui_get_base_height() | |
| 1397 { | |
| 1398 int base_height; | |
| 1399 | |
| 1400 base_height = 2 * gui.border_offset; | |
| 1401 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_BOTTOM]) | |
| 1402 base_height += gui.scrollbar_height; | |
| 1403 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 1404 /* We can't take the sizes properly into account until anything is | |
| 1405 * realized. Therefore we recalculate all the values here just before | |
| 1406 * setting the size. (--mdcki) */ | |
| 1407 #else | |
| 1408 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 1409 if (gui.menu_is_active) | |
| 1410 base_height += gui.menu_height; | |
| 1411 # endif | |
| 1412 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 1413 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL) | |
| 1414 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) && defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) | |
| 1415 base_height += (TOOLBAR_BUTTON_HEIGHT + TOOLBAR_BORDER_HEIGHT); | |
| 1416 # else | |
| 1417 base_height += gui.toolbar_height; | |
| 1418 # endif | |
| 1419 # endif | |
| 819 | 1420 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) && (defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) \ |
| 1421 || defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF)) | |
| 810 | 1422 if (gui_has_tabline()) |
| 843 | 1423 base_height += gui.tabline_height; |
| 810 | 1424 # endif |
| 7 | 1425 # ifdef FEAT_FOOTER |
| 1426 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_FOOTER) != NULL) | |
| 1427 base_height += gui.footer_height; | |
| 1428 # endif | |
| 1429 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
| 1430 base_height += gui_mch_text_area_extra_height(); | |
| 1431 # endif | |
| 1432 #endif | |
| 1433 return base_height; | |
| 1434 } | |
| 1435 | |
| 1436 /* | |
| 1437 * Should be called after the GUI shell has been resized. Its arguments are | |
| 1438 * the new width and height of the shell in pixels. | |
| 1439 */ | |
| 1440 void | |
| 1441 gui_resize_shell(pixel_width, pixel_height) | |
| 1442 int pixel_width; | |
| 1443 int pixel_height; | |
| 1444 { | |
| 1445 static int busy = FALSE; | |
| 1446 | |
| 1447 if (!gui.shell_created) /* ignore when still initializing */ | |
| 1448 return; | |
| 1449 | |
| 1450 /* | |
| 1451 * Can't resize the screen while it is being redrawn. Remember the new | |
| 1452 * size and handle it later. | |
| 1453 */ | |
| 1454 if (updating_screen || busy) | |
| 1455 { | |
| 1456 new_pixel_width = pixel_width; | |
| 1457 new_pixel_height = pixel_height; | |
| 1458 return; | |
| 1459 } | |
| 1460 | |
| 1461 again: | |
| 1462 busy = TRUE; | |
| 1463 | |
| 1464 /* Flush pending output before redrawing */ | |
| 1465 out_flush(); | |
| 1466 | |
| 1467 gui.num_cols = (pixel_width - gui_get_base_width()) / gui.char_width; | |
| 1529 | 1468 gui.num_rows = (pixel_height - gui_get_base_height()) / gui.char_height; |
| 7 | 1469 |
| 1470 gui_position_components(pixel_width); | |
| 1471 | |
| 1472 gui_reset_scroll_region(); | |
| 1473 /* | |
| 1474 * At the "more" and ":confirm" prompt there is no redraw, put the cursor | |
| 1475 * at the last line here (why does it have to be one row too low?). | |
| 1476 */ | |
| 1477 if (State == ASKMORE || State == CONFIRM) | |
| 1478 gui.row = gui.num_rows; | |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 /* Only comparing Rows and Columns may be sufficient, but let's stay on | |
| 1481 * the safe side. */ | |
| 1482 if (gui.num_rows != screen_Rows || gui.num_cols != screen_Columns | |
| 1483 || gui.num_rows != Rows || gui.num_cols != Columns) | |
| 1484 shell_resized(); | |
| 1485 | |
| 1486 gui_update_scrollbars(TRUE); | |
| 1487 gui_update_cursor(FALSE, TRUE); | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1488 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 1489 xim_set_status_area(); |
| 1490 #endif | |
| 1491 | |
| 1492 busy = FALSE; | |
| 669 | 1493 |
| 7 | 1494 /* |
| 1495 * We could have been called again while redrawing the screen. | |
| 1496 * Need to do it all again with the latest size then. | |
| 1497 */ | |
| 1498 if (new_pixel_height) | |
| 1499 { | |
| 1500 pixel_width = new_pixel_width; | |
| 1501 pixel_height = new_pixel_height; | |
| 1502 new_pixel_width = 0; | |
| 1503 new_pixel_height = 0; | |
| 1504 goto again; | |
| 1505 } | |
| 1506 } | |
| 1507 | |
| 1508 /* | |
| 1509 * Check if gui_resize_shell() must be called. | |
| 1510 */ | |
| 1511 void | |
| 1512 gui_may_resize_shell() | |
| 1513 { | |
| 1514 int h, w; | |
| 1515 | |
| 1516 if (new_pixel_height) | |
| 1517 { | |
| 1518 /* careful: gui_resize_shell() may postpone the resize again if we | |
| 1519 * were called indirectly by it */ | |
| 1520 w = new_pixel_width; | |
| 1521 h = new_pixel_height; | |
| 1522 new_pixel_width = 0; | |
| 1523 new_pixel_height = 0; | |
| 1524 gui_resize_shell(w, h); | |
| 1525 } | |
| 1526 } | |
| 1527 | |
| 1528 int | |
| 1529 gui_get_shellsize() | |
| 1530 { | |
| 1531 Rows = gui.num_rows; | |
| 1532 Columns = gui.num_cols; | |
| 1533 return OK; | |
| 1534 } | |
| 1535 | |
| 1536 /* | |
| 1537 * Set the size of the Vim shell according to Rows and Columns. | |
| 444 | 1538 * If "fit_to_display" is TRUE then the size may be reduced to fit the window |
| 1539 * on the screen. | |
| 7 | 1540 */ |
| 1541 void | |
| 811 | 1542 gui_set_shellsize(mustset, fit_to_display, direction) |
| 1884 | 1543 int mustset UNUSED; /* set by the user */ |
| 7 | 1544 int fit_to_display; |
| 811 | 1545 int direction; /* RESIZE_HOR, RESIZE_VER */ |
| 7 | 1546 { |
| 1547 int base_width; | |
| 1548 int base_height; | |
| 1549 int width; | |
| 1550 int height; | |
| 1551 int min_width; | |
| 1552 int min_height; | |
| 1553 int screen_w; | |
| 1554 int screen_h; | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1555 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 1967 | 1556 int un_maximize = mustset; |
|
2311
ccda151dde4e
Support completion for ":find". (Nazri Ramliy)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2282
diff
changeset
|
1557 int did_adjust = 0; |
| 1967 | 1558 #endif |
|
2065
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1559 int x = -1, y = -1; |
| 7 | 1560 |
| 1561 if (!gui.shell_created) | |
| 1562 return; | |
| 1563 | |
| 3014 | 1564 #if defined(MSWIN) || defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 1565 /* If not setting to a user specified size and maximized, calculate the |
| 1566 * number of characters that fit in the maximized window. */ | |
| 1567 if (!mustset && gui_mch_maximized()) | |
| 1568 { | |
| 1569 gui_mch_newfont(); | |
| 1570 return; | |
| 1571 } | |
| 1572 #endif | |
| 1573 | |
| 1574 base_width = gui_get_base_width(); | |
| 1575 base_height = gui_get_base_height(); | |
|
2065
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1576 if (fit_to_display) |
|
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1577 /* Remember the original window position. */ |
|
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1578 gui_mch_get_winpos(&x, &y); |
|
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1579 |
| 7 | 1580 #ifdef USE_SUN_WORKSHOP |
| 1581 if (!mustset && usingSunWorkShop | |
| 1582 && workshop_get_width_height(&width, &height)) | |
| 1583 { | |
| 1584 Columns = (width - base_width + gui.char_width - 1) / gui.char_width; | |
| 1585 Rows = (height - base_height + gui.char_height - 1) / gui.char_height; | |
| 1586 } | |
| 1587 else | |
| 1588 #endif | |
| 1589 { | |
| 1590 width = Columns * gui.char_width + base_width; | |
| 1591 height = Rows * gui.char_height + base_height; | |
| 1592 } | |
| 1593 | |
| 1594 if (fit_to_display) | |
| 1595 { | |
| 1596 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(&screen_w, &screen_h); | |
| 811 | 1597 if ((direction & RESIZE_HOR) && width > screen_w) |
| 7 | 1598 { |
| 1599 Columns = (screen_w - base_width) / gui.char_width; | |
| 1600 if (Columns < MIN_COLUMNS) | |
| 1601 Columns = MIN_COLUMNS; | |
| 1602 width = Columns * gui.char_width + base_width; | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1603 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 1967 | 1604 ++did_adjust; |
| 1605 #endif | |
| 7 | 1606 } |
| 811 | 1607 if ((direction & RESIZE_VERT) && height > screen_h) |
| 7 | 1608 { |
| 1609 Rows = (screen_h - base_height) / gui.char_height; | |
| 1610 check_shellsize(); | |
| 1611 height = Rows * gui.char_height + base_height; | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1612 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 1967 | 1613 ++did_adjust; |
| 1614 #endif | |
| 7 | 1615 } |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1616 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 1967 | 1617 if (did_adjust == 2 || (width + gui.char_width >= screen_w |
| 1618 && height + gui.char_height >= screen_h)) | |
| 1619 /* don't unmaximize if at maximum size */ | |
| 1620 un_maximize = FALSE; | |
| 1621 #endif | |
| 7 | 1622 } |
|
5070
cf52d2a8c05c
updated for version 7.3.1278
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5045
diff
changeset
|
1623 limit_screen_size(); |
| 7 | 1624 gui.num_cols = Columns; |
| 1625 gui.num_rows = Rows; | |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 min_width = base_width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width; | |
| 1628 min_height = base_height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height; | |
| 1967 | 1629 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 685 | 1630 min_height += tabline_height() * gui.char_height; |
| 1967 | 1631 #endif |
| 1632 | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
1633 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 1967 | 1634 if (un_maximize) |
| 1635 { | |
| 1636 /* If the window size is smaller than the screen unmaximize the | |
| 1637 * window, otherwise resizing won't work. */ | |
| 1638 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(&screen_w, &screen_h); | |
| 1639 if ((width + gui.char_width < screen_w | |
| 1640 || height + gui.char_height * 2 < screen_h) | |
| 1641 && gui_mch_maximized()) | |
| 1642 gui_mch_unmaximize(); | |
| 1643 } | |
| 1644 #endif | |
| 7 | 1645 |
| 1646 gui_mch_set_shellsize(width, height, min_width, min_height, | |
| 811 | 1647 base_width, base_height, direction); |
|
2065
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1648 |
|
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1649 if (fit_to_display && x >= 0 && y >= 0) |
| 7 | 1650 { |
|
2065
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1651 /* Some window managers put the Vim window left of/above the screen. |
|
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1652 * Only change the position if it wasn't already negative before |
|
9b78bb3794ba
updated for version 7.2.350
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1967
diff
changeset
|
1653 * (happens on MS-Windows with a secondary monitor). */ |
| 7 | 1654 gui_mch_update(); |
| 1655 if (gui_mch_get_winpos(&x, &y) == OK && (x < 0 || y < 0)) | |
| 1656 gui_mch_set_winpos(x < 0 ? 0 : x, y < 0 ? 0 : y); | |
| 1657 } | |
| 1658 | |
| 1659 gui_position_components(width); | |
| 1660 gui_update_scrollbars(TRUE); | |
| 1661 gui_reset_scroll_region(); | |
| 1662 } | |
| 1663 | |
| 1664 /* | |
| 1665 * Called when Rows and/or Columns has changed. | |
| 1666 */ | |
| 1667 void | |
| 1668 gui_new_shellsize() | |
| 1669 { | |
| 1670 gui_reset_scroll_region(); | |
| 1671 } | |
| 1672 | |
| 1673 /* | |
| 1674 * Make scroll region cover whole screen. | |
| 1675 */ | |
| 1676 void | |
| 1677 gui_reset_scroll_region() | |
| 1678 { | |
| 1679 gui.scroll_region_top = 0; | |
| 1680 gui.scroll_region_bot = gui.num_rows - 1; | |
| 1681 gui.scroll_region_left = 0; | |
| 1682 gui.scroll_region_right = gui.num_cols - 1; | |
| 1683 } | |
| 1684 | |
| 1685 void | |
| 1686 gui_start_highlight(mask) | |
| 1687 int mask; | |
| 1688 { | |
| 1689 if (mask > HL_ALL) /* highlight code */ | |
| 1690 gui.highlight_mask = mask; | |
| 1691 else /* mask */ | |
| 1692 gui.highlight_mask |= mask; | |
| 1693 } | |
| 1694 | |
| 1695 void | |
| 1696 gui_stop_highlight(mask) | |
| 1697 int mask; | |
| 1698 { | |
| 1699 if (mask > HL_ALL) /* highlight code */ | |
| 1700 gui.highlight_mask = HL_NORMAL; | |
| 1701 else /* mask */ | |
| 1702 gui.highlight_mask &= ~mask; | |
| 1703 } | |
| 1704 | |
| 1705 /* | |
| 1706 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to | |
| 1707 * (row2, col2) inclusive. | |
| 1708 */ | |
| 1709 void | |
| 1710 gui_clear_block(row1, col1, row2, col2) | |
| 1711 int row1; | |
| 1712 int col1; | |
| 1713 int row2; | |
| 1714 int col2; | |
| 1715 { | |
| 1716 /* Clear the selection if we are about to write over it */ | |
| 1717 clip_may_clear_selection(row1, row2); | |
| 1718 | |
| 1719 gui_mch_clear_block(row1, col1, row2, col2); | |
| 1720 | |
| 1721 /* Invalidate cursor if it was in this block */ | |
| 1722 if ( gui.cursor_row >= row1 && gui.cursor_row <= row2 | |
| 1723 && gui.cursor_col >= col1 && gui.cursor_col <= col2) | |
| 1724 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 1725 } | |
| 1726 | |
| 1727 /* | |
| 1728 * Write code to update the cursor later. This avoids the need to flush the | |
| 1729 * output buffer before calling gui_update_cursor(). | |
| 1730 */ | |
| 1731 void | |
| 1732 gui_update_cursor_later() | |
| 1733 { | |
| 1734 OUT_STR(IF_EB("\033|s", ESC_STR "|s")); | |
| 1735 } | |
| 1736 | |
| 1737 void | |
| 1738 gui_write(s, len) | |
| 1739 char_u *s; | |
| 1740 int len; | |
| 1741 { | |
| 1742 char_u *p; | |
| 1743 int arg1 = 0, arg2 = 0; | |
| 1744 int force_cursor = FALSE; /* force cursor update */ | |
| 1745 int force_scrollbar = FALSE; | |
| 1746 static win_T *old_curwin = NULL; | |
| 1747 | |
| 1748 /* #define DEBUG_GUI_WRITE */ | |
| 1749 #ifdef DEBUG_GUI_WRITE | |
| 1750 { | |
| 1751 int i; | |
| 1752 char_u *str; | |
| 1753 | |
| 1754 printf("gui_write(%d):\n ", len); | |
| 1755 for (i = 0; i < len; i++) | |
| 1756 if (s[i] == ESC) | |
| 1757 { | |
| 1758 if (i != 0) | |
| 1759 printf("\n "); | |
| 1760 printf("<ESC>"); | |
| 1761 } | |
| 1762 else | |
| 1763 { | |
| 1764 str = transchar_byte(s[i]); | |
| 1765 if (str[0] && str[1]) | |
| 1766 printf("<%s>", (char *)str); | |
| 1767 else | |
| 1768 printf("%s", (char *)str); | |
| 1769 } | |
| 1770 printf("\n"); | |
| 1771 } | |
| 1772 #endif | |
| 1773 while (len) | |
| 1774 { | |
| 1775 if (s[0] == ESC && s[1] == '|') | |
| 1776 { | |
| 1777 p = s + 2; | |
| 1778 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p)) | |
| 1779 { | |
| 1780 arg1 = getdigits(&p); | |
| 1781 if (p > s + len) | |
| 1782 break; | |
| 1783 if (*p == ';') | |
| 1784 { | |
| 1785 ++p; | |
| 1786 arg2 = getdigits(&p); | |
| 1787 if (p > s + len) | |
| 1788 break; | |
| 1789 } | |
| 1790 } | |
| 1791 switch (*p) | |
| 1792 { | |
| 1793 case 'C': /* Clear screen */ | |
| 1794 clip_scroll_selection(9999); | |
| 1795 gui_mch_clear_all(); | |
| 1796 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 1797 force_scrollbar = TRUE; | |
| 1798 break; | |
| 1799 case 'M': /* Move cursor */ | |
| 1800 gui_set_cursor(arg1, arg2); | |
| 1801 break; | |
| 1802 case 's': /* force cursor (shape) update */ | |
| 1803 force_cursor = TRUE; | |
| 1804 break; | |
| 1805 case 'R': /* Set scroll region */ | |
| 1806 if (arg1 < arg2) | |
| 1807 { | |
| 1808 gui.scroll_region_top = arg1; | |
| 1809 gui.scroll_region_bot = arg2; | |
| 1810 } | |
| 1811 else | |
| 1812 { | |
| 1813 gui.scroll_region_top = arg2; | |
| 1814 gui.scroll_region_bot = arg1; | |
| 1815 } | |
| 1816 break; | |
| 1817 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 1818 case 'V': /* Set vertical scroll region */ | |
| 1819 if (arg1 < arg2) | |
| 1820 { | |
| 1821 gui.scroll_region_left = arg1; | |
| 1822 gui.scroll_region_right = arg2; | |
| 1823 } | |
| 1824 else | |
| 1825 { | |
| 1826 gui.scroll_region_left = arg2; | |
| 1827 gui.scroll_region_right = arg1; | |
| 1828 } | |
| 1829 break; | |
| 1830 #endif | |
| 1831 case 'd': /* Delete line */ | |
| 1832 gui_delete_lines(gui.row, 1); | |
| 1833 break; | |
| 1834 case 'D': /* Delete lines */ | |
| 1835 gui_delete_lines(gui.row, arg1); | |
| 1836 break; | |
| 1837 case 'i': /* Insert line */ | |
| 1838 gui_insert_lines(gui.row, 1); | |
| 1839 break; | |
| 1840 case 'I': /* Insert lines */ | |
| 1841 gui_insert_lines(gui.row, arg1); | |
| 1842 break; | |
| 1843 case '$': /* Clear to end-of-line */ | |
| 1844 gui_clear_block(gui.row, gui.col, gui.row, | |
| 1845 (int)Columns - 1); | |
| 1846 break; | |
| 1847 case 'h': /* Turn on highlighting */ | |
| 1848 gui_start_highlight(arg1); | |
| 1849 break; | |
| 1850 case 'H': /* Turn off highlighting */ | |
| 1851 gui_stop_highlight(arg1); | |
| 1852 break; | |
| 1853 case 'f': /* flash the window (visual bell) */ | |
| 1854 gui_mch_flash(arg1 == 0 ? 20 : arg1); | |
| 1855 break; | |
| 1856 default: | |
| 1857 p = s + 1; /* Skip the ESC */ | |
| 1858 break; | |
| 1859 } | |
| 1860 len -= (int)(++p - s); | |
| 1861 s = p; | |
| 1862 } | |
| 1863 else if ( | |
| 1864 #ifdef EBCDIC | |
| 1865 CtrlChar(s[0]) != 0 /* Ctrl character */ | |
| 1866 #else | |
| 1867 s[0] < 0x20 /* Ctrl character */ | |
| 1868 #endif | |
| 1869 #ifdef FEAT_SIGN_ICONS | |
| 1870 && s[0] != SIGN_BYTE | |
| 1871 # ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 1872 && s[0] != MULTISIGN_BYTE | |
| 1873 # endif | |
| 1874 #endif | |
| 1875 ) | |
| 1876 { | |
| 1877 if (s[0] == '\n') /* NL */ | |
| 1878 { | |
| 1879 gui.col = 0; | |
| 1880 if (gui.row < gui.scroll_region_bot) | |
| 1881 gui.row++; | |
| 1882 else | |
| 1883 gui_delete_lines(gui.scroll_region_top, 1); | |
| 1884 } | |
| 1885 else if (s[0] == '\r') /* CR */ | |
| 1886 { | |
| 1887 gui.col = 0; | |
| 1888 } | |
| 1889 else if (s[0] == '\b') /* Backspace */ | |
| 1890 { | |
| 1891 if (gui.col) | |
| 1892 --gui.col; | |
| 1893 } | |
| 1894 else if (s[0] == Ctrl_L) /* cursor-right */ | |
| 1895 { | |
| 1896 ++gui.col; | |
| 1897 } | |
| 1898 else if (s[0] == Ctrl_G) /* Beep */ | |
| 1899 { | |
| 1900 gui_mch_beep(); | |
| 1901 } | |
| 1902 /* Other Ctrl character: shouldn't happen! */ | |
| 1903 | |
| 1904 --len; /* Skip this char */ | |
| 1905 ++s; | |
| 1906 } | |
| 1907 else | |
| 1908 { | |
| 1909 p = s; | |
| 1910 while (len > 0 && ( | |
| 1911 #ifdef EBCDIC | |
| 1912 CtrlChar(*p) == 0 | |
| 1913 #else | |
| 1914 *p >= 0x20 | |
| 1915 #endif | |
| 1916 #ifdef FEAT_SIGN_ICONS | |
| 1917 || *p == SIGN_BYTE | |
| 1918 # ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 1919 || *p == MULTISIGN_BYTE | |
| 1920 # endif | |
| 1921 #endif | |
| 1922 )) | |
| 1923 { | |
| 1924 len--; | |
| 1925 p++; | |
| 1926 } | |
| 1927 gui_outstr(s, (int)(p - s)); | |
| 1928 s = p; | |
| 1929 } | |
| 1930 } | |
| 1931 | |
| 1932 /* Postponed update of the cursor (won't work if "can_update_cursor" isn't | |
| 1933 * set). */ | |
| 1934 if (force_cursor) | |
| 1935 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, TRUE); | |
| 1936 | |
| 1937 /* When switching to another window the dragging must have stopped. | |
| 1938 * Required for GTK, dragged_sb isn't reset. */ | |
| 1939 if (old_curwin != curwin) | |
| 1940 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_NONE; | |
| 1941 | |
| 1942 /* Update the scrollbars after clearing the screen or when switched | |
| 1943 * to another window. | |
| 1944 * Update the horizontal scrollbar always, it's difficult to check all | |
| 1945 * situations where it might change. */ | |
| 1946 if (force_scrollbar || old_curwin != curwin) | |
| 1947 gui_update_scrollbars(force_scrollbar); | |
| 1948 else | |
| 1949 gui_update_horiz_scrollbar(FALSE); | |
| 1950 old_curwin = curwin; | |
| 1951 | |
| 1952 /* | |
| 1953 * We need to make sure this is cleared since Athena doesn't tell us when | |
| 1954 * he is done dragging. Do the same for GTK. | |
| 1955 */ | |
| 574 | 1956 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_ATHENA) || defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 1957 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_NONE; |
| 1958 #endif | |
| 1959 | |
| 1960 gui_mch_flush(); /* In case vim decides to take a nap */ | |
| 1961 } | |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 /* | |
| 1964 * When ScreenLines[] is invalid, updating the cursor should not be done, it | |
| 1965 * produces wrong results. Call gui_dont_update_cursor() before that code and | |
| 1966 * gui_can_update_cursor() afterwards. | |
| 1967 */ | |
| 1968 void | |
| 1969 gui_dont_update_cursor() | |
| 1970 { | |
| 1971 if (gui.in_use) | |
| 1972 { | |
| 1973 /* Undraw the cursor now, we probably can't do it after the change. */ | |
| 1974 gui_undraw_cursor(); | |
| 1975 can_update_cursor = FALSE; | |
| 1976 } | |
| 1977 } | |
| 1978 | |
| 1979 void | |
| 1980 gui_can_update_cursor() | |
| 1981 { | |
| 1982 can_update_cursor = TRUE; | |
| 1983 /* No need to update the cursor right now, there is always more output | |
| 1984 * after scrolling. */ | |
| 1985 } | |
| 1986 | |
| 1987 static void | |
| 1988 gui_outstr(s, len) | |
| 1989 char_u *s; | |
| 1990 int len; | |
| 1991 { | |
| 1992 int this_len; | |
| 1993 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 1994 int cells; | |
| 1995 #endif | |
| 1996 | |
| 1997 if (len == 0) | |
| 1998 return; | |
| 1999 | |
| 2000 if (len < 0) | |
| 2001 len = (int)STRLEN(s); | |
| 2002 | |
| 2003 while (len > 0) | |
| 2004 { | |
| 2005 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2006 if (has_mbyte) | |
| 2007 { | |
| 2008 /* Find out how many chars fit in the current line. */ | |
| 2009 cells = 0; | |
| 2010 for (this_len = 0; this_len < len; ) | |
| 2011 { | |
| 2012 cells += (*mb_ptr2cells)(s + this_len); | |
| 2013 if (gui.col + cells > Columns) | |
| 2014 break; | |
| 474 | 2015 this_len += (*mb_ptr2len)(s + this_len); |
| 7 | 2016 } |
| 2017 if (this_len > len) | |
| 2018 this_len = len; /* don't include following composing char */ | |
| 2019 } | |
| 2020 else | |
| 2021 #endif | |
| 2022 if (gui.col + len > Columns) | |
| 2023 this_len = Columns - gui.col; | |
| 2024 else | |
| 2025 this_len = len; | |
| 2026 | |
| 2027 (void)gui_outstr_nowrap(s, this_len, | |
| 2028 0, (guicolor_T)0, (guicolor_T)0, 0); | |
| 2029 s += this_len; | |
| 2030 len -= this_len; | |
| 2031 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2032 /* fill up for a double-width char that doesn't fit. */ | |
| 2033 if (len > 0 && gui.col < Columns) | |
| 2034 (void)gui_outstr_nowrap((char_u *)" ", 1, | |
| 2035 0, (guicolor_T)0, (guicolor_T)0, 0); | |
| 2036 #endif | |
| 2037 /* The cursor may wrap to the next line. */ | |
| 2038 if (gui.col >= Columns) | |
| 2039 { | |
| 2040 gui.col = 0; | |
| 2041 gui.row++; | |
| 2042 } | |
| 2043 } | |
| 2044 } | |
| 2045 | |
| 2046 /* | |
| 2047 * Output one character (may be one or two display cells). | |
| 2048 * Caller must check for valid "off". | |
| 2049 * Returns FAIL or OK, just like gui_outstr_nowrap(). | |
| 2050 */ | |
| 2051 static int | |
| 2052 gui_screenchar(off, flags, fg, bg, back) | |
| 2053 int off; /* Offset from start of screen */ | |
| 2054 int flags; | |
| 2055 guicolor_T fg, bg; /* colors for cursor */ | |
| 2056 int back; /* backup this many chars when using bold trick */ | |
| 2057 { | |
| 2058 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2059 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES + 1]; | |
| 2060 | |
| 2061 /* Don't draw right halve of a double-width UTF-8 char. "cannot happen" */ | |
| 2062 if (enc_utf8 && ScreenLines[off] == 0) | |
| 2063 return OK; | |
| 2064 | |
| 2065 if (enc_utf8 && ScreenLinesUC[off] != 0) | |
| 2066 /* Draw UTF-8 multi-byte character. */ | |
| 2067 return gui_outstr_nowrap(buf, utfc_char2bytes(off, buf), | |
| 2068 flags, fg, bg, back); | |
| 2069 | |
| 2070 if (enc_dbcs == DBCS_JPNU && ScreenLines[off] == 0x8e) | |
| 2071 { | |
| 2072 buf[0] = ScreenLines[off]; | |
| 2073 buf[1] = ScreenLines2[off]; | |
| 2074 return gui_outstr_nowrap(buf, 2, flags, fg, bg, back); | |
| 2075 } | |
| 2076 | |
| 2077 /* Draw non-multi-byte character or DBCS character. */ | |
| 2078 return gui_outstr_nowrap(ScreenLines + off, | |
| 474 | 2079 enc_dbcs ? (*mb_ptr2len)(ScreenLines + off) : 1, |
| 7 | 2080 flags, fg, bg, back); |
| 2081 #else | |
| 2082 return gui_outstr_nowrap(ScreenLines + off, 1, flags, fg, bg, back); | |
| 2083 #endif | |
| 2084 } | |
| 2085 | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2086 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 2087 /* |
| 2088 * Output the string at the given screen position. This is used in place | |
| 2089 * of gui_screenchar() where possible because Pango needs as much context | |
| 2090 * as possible to work nicely. It's a lot faster as well. | |
| 2091 */ | |
| 2092 static int | |
| 2093 gui_screenstr(off, len, flags, fg, bg, back) | |
| 2094 int off; /* Offset from start of screen */ | |
| 2095 int len; /* string length in screen cells */ | |
| 2096 int flags; | |
| 2097 guicolor_T fg, bg; /* colors for cursor */ | |
| 2098 int back; /* backup this many chars when using bold trick */ | |
| 2099 { | |
| 2100 char_u *buf; | |
| 2101 int outlen = 0; | |
| 2102 int i; | |
| 2103 int retval; | |
| 2104 | |
| 2105 if (len <= 0) /* "cannot happen"? */ | |
| 2106 return OK; | |
| 2107 | |
| 2108 if (enc_utf8) | |
| 2109 { | |
| 2110 buf = alloc((unsigned)(len * MB_MAXBYTES + 1)); | |
| 2111 if (buf == NULL) | |
| 2112 return OK; /* not much we could do here... */ | |
| 2113 | |
| 2114 for (i = off; i < off + len; ++i) | |
| 2115 { | |
| 2116 if (ScreenLines[i] == 0) | |
| 2117 continue; /* skip second half of double-width char */ | |
| 2118 | |
| 2119 if (ScreenLinesUC[i] == 0) | |
| 2120 buf[outlen++] = ScreenLines[i]; | |
| 2121 else | |
| 2122 outlen += utfc_char2bytes(i, buf + outlen); | |
| 2123 } | |
| 2124 | |
| 2125 buf[outlen] = NUL; /* only to aid debugging */ | |
| 2126 retval = gui_outstr_nowrap(buf, outlen, flags, fg, bg, back); | |
| 2127 vim_free(buf); | |
| 2128 | |
| 2129 return retval; | |
| 2130 } | |
| 2131 else if (enc_dbcs == DBCS_JPNU) | |
| 2132 { | |
| 2133 buf = alloc((unsigned)(len * 2 + 1)); | |
| 2134 if (buf == NULL) | |
| 2135 return OK; /* not much we could do here... */ | |
| 2136 | |
| 2137 for (i = off; i < off + len; ++i) | |
| 2138 { | |
| 2139 buf[outlen++] = ScreenLines[i]; | |
| 2140 | |
| 2141 /* handle double-byte single-width char */ | |
| 2142 if (ScreenLines[i] == 0x8e) | |
| 2143 buf[outlen++] = ScreenLines2[i]; | |
| 2144 else if (MB_BYTE2LEN(ScreenLines[i]) == 2) | |
| 2145 buf[outlen++] = ScreenLines[++i]; | |
| 2146 } | |
| 2147 | |
| 2148 buf[outlen] = NUL; /* only to aid debugging */ | |
| 2149 retval = gui_outstr_nowrap(buf, outlen, flags, fg, bg, back); | |
| 2150 vim_free(buf); | |
| 2151 | |
| 2152 return retval; | |
| 2153 } | |
| 2154 else | |
| 2155 { | |
| 2156 return gui_outstr_nowrap(&ScreenLines[off], len, | |
| 2157 flags, fg, bg, back); | |
| 2158 } | |
| 2159 } | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2160 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GTK */ |
| 7 | 2161 |
| 2162 /* | |
| 2163 * Output the given string at the current cursor position. If the string is | |
| 2164 * too long to fit on the line, then it is truncated. | |
| 2165 * "flags": | |
| 2166 * GUI_MON_IS_CURSOR should only be used when this function is being called to | |
| 2167 * actually draw (an inverted) cursor. | |
| 1199 | 2168 * GUI_MON_TRS_CURSOR is used to draw the cursor text with a transparent |
| 7 | 2169 * background. |
| 2170 * GUI_MON_NOCLEAR is used to avoid clearing the selection when drawing over | |
| 2171 * it. | |
| 2172 * Returns OK, unless "back" is non-zero and using the bold trick, then return | |
| 2173 * FAIL (the caller should start drawing "back" chars back). | |
| 2174 */ | |
| 2175 int | |
| 2176 gui_outstr_nowrap(s, len, flags, fg, bg, back) | |
| 2177 char_u *s; | |
| 2178 int len; | |
| 2179 int flags; | |
| 2180 guicolor_T fg, bg; /* colors for cursor */ | |
| 2181 int back; /* backup this many chars when using bold trick */ | |
| 2182 { | |
| 2183 long_u highlight_mask; | |
| 2184 long_u hl_mask_todo; | |
| 2185 guicolor_T fg_color; | |
| 2186 guicolor_T bg_color; | |
| 203 | 2187 guicolor_T sp_color; |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2188 #if !defined(MSWIN16_FASTTEXT) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 2189 GuiFont font = NOFONT; |
|
4950
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2190 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2191 GuiFont wide_font = NOFONT; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2192 # endif |
| 7 | 2193 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET |
| 2194 GuiFontset fontset = NOFONTSET; | |
| 2195 # endif | |
| 2196 #endif | |
| 2197 attrentry_T *aep = NULL; | |
| 2198 int draw_flags; | |
| 2199 int col = gui.col; | |
| 2200 #ifdef FEAT_SIGN_ICONS | |
| 2201 int draw_sign = FALSE; | |
| 2202 # ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 2203 int multi_sign = FALSE; | |
| 2204 # endif | |
| 2205 #endif | |
| 2206 | |
| 2207 if (len < 0) | |
| 2208 len = (int)STRLEN(s); | |
| 2209 if (len == 0) | |
| 2210 return OK; | |
| 2211 | |
| 2212 #ifdef FEAT_SIGN_ICONS | |
| 2213 if (*s == SIGN_BYTE | |
| 2214 # ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 2215 || *s == MULTISIGN_BYTE | |
| 2216 # endif | |
| 2217 ) | |
| 2218 { | |
| 2219 # ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 2220 if (*s == MULTISIGN_BYTE) | |
| 2221 multi_sign = TRUE; | |
| 2222 # endif | |
| 2223 /* draw spaces instead */ | |
| 2224 s = (char_u *)" "; | |
| 2225 if (len == 1 && col > 0) | |
| 2226 --col; | |
| 2227 len = 2; | |
| 2228 draw_sign = TRUE; | |
| 2229 highlight_mask = 0; | |
| 2230 } | |
| 2231 else | |
| 2232 #endif | |
| 2233 if (gui.highlight_mask > HL_ALL) | |
| 2234 { | |
| 2235 aep = syn_gui_attr2entry(gui.highlight_mask); | |
| 2236 if (aep == NULL) /* highlighting not set */ | |
| 2237 highlight_mask = 0; | |
| 2238 else | |
| 2239 highlight_mask = aep->ae_attr; | |
| 2240 } | |
| 2241 else | |
| 2242 highlight_mask = gui.highlight_mask; | |
| 2243 hl_mask_todo = highlight_mask; | |
| 2244 | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2245 #if !defined(MSWIN16_FASTTEXT) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 2246 /* Set the font */ |
| 2247 if (aep != NULL && aep->ae_u.gui.font != NOFONT) | |
| 2248 font = aep->ae_u.gui.font; | |
| 2249 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 2250 else if (aep != NULL && aep->ae_u.gui.fontset != NOFONTSET) | |
| 2251 fontset = aep->ae_u.gui.fontset; | |
| 2252 # endif | |
| 2253 else | |
| 2254 { | |
| 2255 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 2256 if (gui.fontset != NOFONTSET) | |
| 2257 fontset = gui.fontset; | |
| 2258 else | |
| 2259 # endif | |
| 2260 if (hl_mask_todo & (HL_BOLD | HL_STANDOUT)) | |
| 2261 { | |
| 2262 if ((hl_mask_todo & HL_ITALIC) && gui.boldital_font != NOFONT) | |
| 2263 { | |
| 2264 font = gui.boldital_font; | |
| 2265 hl_mask_todo &= ~(HL_BOLD | HL_STANDOUT | HL_ITALIC); | |
| 2266 } | |
| 2267 else if (gui.bold_font != NOFONT) | |
| 2268 { | |
| 2269 font = gui.bold_font; | |
| 2270 hl_mask_todo &= ~(HL_BOLD | HL_STANDOUT); | |
| 2271 } | |
| 2272 else | |
| 2273 font = gui.norm_font; | |
| 2274 } | |
| 2275 else if ((hl_mask_todo & HL_ITALIC) && gui.ital_font != NOFONT) | |
| 2276 { | |
| 2277 font = gui.ital_font; | |
| 2278 hl_mask_todo &= ~HL_ITALIC; | |
| 2279 } | |
| 2280 else | |
| 2281 font = gui.norm_font; | |
|
4950
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2282 |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2283 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2284 /* |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2285 * Choose correct wide_font by font. wide_font should be set with font |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2286 * at same time in above block. But it will make many "ifdef" nasty |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2287 * blocks. So we do it here. |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2288 */ |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2289 if (font == gui.boldital_font && gui.wide_boldital_font) |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2290 wide_font = gui.wide_boldital_font; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2291 else if (font == gui.bold_font && gui.wide_bold_font) |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2292 wide_font = gui.wide_bold_font; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2293 else if (font == gui.ital_font && gui.wide_ital_font) |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2294 wide_font = gui.wide_ital_font; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2295 else if (font == gui.norm_font && gui.wide_font) |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2296 wide_font = gui.wide_font; |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2297 # endif |
|
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2298 |
| 7 | 2299 } |
| 2300 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 2301 if (fontset != NOFONTSET) | |
| 2302 gui_mch_set_fontset(fontset); | |
| 2303 else | |
| 2304 # endif | |
| 2305 gui_mch_set_font(font); | |
| 2306 #endif | |
| 2307 | |
| 2308 draw_flags = 0; | |
| 2309 | |
| 2310 /* Set the color */ | |
| 2311 bg_color = gui.back_pixel; | |
| 2312 if ((flags & GUI_MON_IS_CURSOR) && gui.in_focus) | |
| 2313 { | |
| 2314 draw_flags |= DRAW_CURSOR; | |
| 2315 fg_color = fg; | |
| 2316 bg_color = bg; | |
| 203 | 2317 sp_color = fg; |
| 7 | 2318 } |
| 2319 else if (aep != NULL) | |
| 2320 { | |
| 2321 fg_color = aep->ae_u.gui.fg_color; | |
| 2322 if (fg_color == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 2323 fg_color = gui.norm_pixel; | |
| 2324 bg_color = aep->ae_u.gui.bg_color; | |
| 2325 if (bg_color == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 2326 bg_color = gui.back_pixel; | |
| 203 | 2327 sp_color = aep->ae_u.gui.sp_color; |
| 2328 if (sp_color == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 2329 sp_color = fg_color; | |
| 7 | 2330 } |
| 2331 else | |
| 203 | 2332 { |
| 7 | 2333 fg_color = gui.norm_pixel; |
| 203 | 2334 sp_color = fg_color; |
| 2335 } | |
| 7 | 2336 |
| 2337 if (highlight_mask & (HL_INVERSE | HL_STANDOUT)) | |
| 2338 { | |
| 2823 | 2339 #if defined(AMIGA) |
| 7 | 2340 gui_mch_set_colors(bg_color, fg_color); |
| 2341 #else | |
| 2342 gui_mch_set_fg_color(bg_color); | |
| 2343 gui_mch_set_bg_color(fg_color); | |
| 2344 #endif | |
| 2345 } | |
| 2346 else | |
| 2347 { | |
| 2823 | 2348 #if defined(AMIGA) |
| 7 | 2349 gui_mch_set_colors(fg_color, bg_color); |
| 2350 #else | |
| 2351 gui_mch_set_fg_color(fg_color); | |
| 2352 gui_mch_set_bg_color(bg_color); | |
| 2353 #endif | |
| 2354 } | |
| 203 | 2355 gui_mch_set_sp_color(sp_color); |
| 7 | 2356 |
| 2357 /* Clear the selection if we are about to write over it */ | |
| 2358 if (!(flags & GUI_MON_NOCLEAR)) | |
| 2359 clip_may_clear_selection(gui.row, gui.row); | |
| 2360 | |
| 2361 | |
| 2362 #ifndef MSWIN16_FASTTEXT | |
| 2363 /* If there's no bold font, then fake it */ | |
| 2364 if (hl_mask_todo & (HL_BOLD | HL_STANDOUT)) | |
| 2365 draw_flags |= DRAW_BOLD; | |
| 2366 #endif | |
| 2367 | |
| 2368 /* | |
| 2369 * When drawing bold or italic characters the spill-over from the left | |
| 2370 * neighbor may be destroyed. Let the caller backup to start redrawing | |
| 2371 * just after a blank. | |
| 2372 */ | |
| 2373 if (back != 0 && ((draw_flags & DRAW_BOLD) || (highlight_mask & HL_ITALIC))) | |
| 2374 return FAIL; | |
| 2375 | |
| 2823 | 2376 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 2377 /* If there's no italic font, then fake it. |
| 2378 * For GTK2, we don't need a different font for italic style. */ | |
| 2379 if (hl_mask_todo & HL_ITALIC) | |
| 2380 draw_flags |= DRAW_ITALIC; | |
| 2381 | |
| 2382 /* Do we underline the text? */ | |
| 2383 if (hl_mask_todo & HL_UNDERLINE) | |
| 2384 draw_flags |= DRAW_UNDERL; | |
| 2385 #else | |
| 2386 /* Do we underline the text? */ | |
| 2387 if ((hl_mask_todo & HL_UNDERLINE) | |
| 2388 # ifndef MSWIN16_FASTTEXT | |
| 2389 || (hl_mask_todo & HL_ITALIC) | |
| 2390 # endif | |
| 2391 ) | |
| 2392 draw_flags |= DRAW_UNDERL; | |
| 2393 #endif | |
| 203 | 2394 /* Do we undercurl the text? */ |
| 2395 if (hl_mask_todo & HL_UNDERCURL) | |
| 2396 draw_flags |= DRAW_UNDERC; | |
| 7 | 2397 |
| 1199 | 2398 /* Do we draw transparently? */ |
| 7 | 2399 if (flags & GUI_MON_TRS_CURSOR) |
| 2400 draw_flags |= DRAW_TRANSP; | |
| 2401 | |
| 2402 /* | |
| 2403 * Draw the text. | |
| 2404 */ | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2405 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 2406 /* The value returned is the length in display cells */ |
| 2407 len = gui_gtk2_draw_string(gui.row, col, s, len, draw_flags); | |
| 2408 #else | |
| 2409 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2410 if (enc_utf8) | |
| 2411 { | |
| 2412 int start; /* index of bytes to be drawn */ | |
| 2413 int cells; /* cellwidth of bytes to be drawn */ | |
| 4352 | 2414 int thislen; /* length of bytes to be drawn */ |
| 7 | 2415 int cn; /* cellwidth of current char */ |
| 2416 int i; /* index of current char */ | |
| 2417 int c; /* current char value */ | |
| 2418 int cl; /* byte length of current char */ | |
| 2419 int comping; /* current char is composing */ | |
| 2420 int scol = col; /* screen column */ | |
| 4053 | 2421 int curr_wide; /* use 'guifontwide' */ |
| 2422 int prev_wide = FALSE; | |
| 2423 int wide_changed; | |
| 7 | 2424 |
| 2425 /* Break the string at a composing character, it has to be drawn on | |
| 2426 * top of the previous character. */ | |
| 2427 start = 0; | |
| 2428 cells = 0; | |
| 2429 for (i = 0; i < len; i += cl) | |
| 2430 { | |
| 2431 c = utf_ptr2char(s + i); | |
| 2432 cn = utf_char2cells(c); | |
| 2433 if (cn > 1 | |
| 2434 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 2435 && fontset == NOFONTSET | |
| 2436 # endif | |
|
4950
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2437 && wide_font != NOFONT) |
| 4053 | 2438 curr_wide = TRUE; |
| 7 | 2439 else |
| 4053 | 2440 curr_wide = FALSE; |
| 7 | 2441 comping = utf_iscomposing(c); |
| 2442 if (!comping) /* count cells from non-composing chars */ | |
| 2443 cells += cn; | |
| 474 | 2444 cl = utf_ptr2len(s + i); |
| 7 | 2445 if (cl == 0) /* hit end of string */ |
| 2446 len = i + cl; /* len must be wrong "cannot happen" */ | |
| 2447 | |
| 4053 | 2448 wide_changed = curr_wide != prev_wide; |
| 2449 | |
| 2450 /* Print the string so far if it's the last character or there is | |
| 7 | 2451 * a composing character. */ |
| 4053 | 2452 if (i + cl >= len || (comping && i > start) || wide_changed |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2237
diff
changeset
|
2453 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) |
| 7 | 2454 || (cn > 1 |
| 2455 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 2456 /* No fontset: At least draw char after wide char at | |
| 2457 * right position. */ | |
| 2458 && fontset == NOFONTSET | |
| 2459 # endif | |
| 2460 ) | |
| 2461 # endif | |
| 2462 ) | |
| 2463 { | |
| 4053 | 2464 if (comping || wide_changed) |
| 7 | 2465 thislen = i - start; |
| 2466 else | |
| 2467 thislen = i - start + cl; | |
| 2468 if (thislen > 0) | |
| 2469 { | |
| 4053 | 2470 if (prev_wide) |
|
4950
ba7db05e1482
updated for version 7.3.1220
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4863
diff
changeset
|
2471 gui_mch_set_font(wide_font); |
| 7 | 2472 gui_mch_draw_string(gui.row, scol, s + start, thislen, |
| 2473 draw_flags); | |
| 4053 | 2474 if (prev_wide) |
| 2475 gui_mch_set_font(font); | |
| 7 | 2476 start += thislen; |
| 2477 } | |
| 2478 scol += cells; | |
| 2479 cells = 0; | |
| 4053 | 2480 /* Adjust to not draw a character which width is changed |
| 2481 * against with last one. */ | |
| 2482 if (wide_changed && !comping) | |
| 7 | 2483 { |
| 4053 | 2484 scol -= cn; |
| 2485 cl = 0; | |
| 7 | 2486 } |
| 2487 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2237
diff
changeset
|
2488 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) |
| 11 | 2489 /* No fontset: draw a space to fill the gap after a wide char |
| 2490 * */ | |
| 7 | 2491 if (cn > 1 && (draw_flags & DRAW_TRANSP) == 0 |
| 2492 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
| 2493 && fontset == NOFONTSET | |
| 2494 # endif | |
| 4053 | 2495 && !wide_changed) |
| 7 | 2496 gui_mch_draw_string(gui.row, scol - 1, (char_u *)" ", |
| 2497 1, draw_flags); | |
| 2498 # endif | |
| 2499 } | |
| 2500 /* Draw a composing char on top of the previous char. */ | |
| 2501 if (comping) | |
| 2502 { | |
| 536 | 2503 # if (defined(__APPLE_CC__) || defined(__MRC__)) && TARGET_API_MAC_CARBON |
| 2504 /* Carbon ATSUI autodraws composing char over previous char */ | |
| 2505 gui_mch_draw_string(gui.row, scol, s + i, cl, | |
| 7 | 2506 draw_flags | DRAW_TRANSP); |
| 187 | 2507 # else |
| 536 | 2508 gui_mch_draw_string(gui.row, scol - cn, s + i, cl, |
| 187 | 2509 draw_flags | DRAW_TRANSP); |
| 2510 # endif | |
| 7 | 2511 start = i + cl; |
| 2512 } | |
| 4053 | 2513 prev_wide = curr_wide; |
| 7 | 2514 } |
| 2515 /* The stuff below assumes "len" is the length in screen columns. */ | |
| 2516 len = scol - col; | |
| 2517 } | |
| 2518 else | |
| 2519 # endif | |
| 2520 { | |
| 2521 gui_mch_draw_string(gui.row, col, s, len, draw_flags); | |
| 2522 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2523 if (enc_dbcs == DBCS_JPNU) | |
| 2524 { | |
| 2525 /* Get the length in display cells, this can be different from the | |
| 2526 * number of bytes for "euc-jp". */ | |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
2527 len = mb_string2cells(s, len); |
| 7 | 2528 } |
| 2529 # endif | |
| 2530 } | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2531 #endif /* !FEAT_GUI_GTK */ |
| 7 | 2532 |
| 2533 if (!(flags & (GUI_MON_IS_CURSOR | GUI_MON_TRS_CURSOR))) | |
| 2534 gui.col = col + len; | |
| 2535 | |
| 2536 /* May need to invert it when it's part of the selection. */ | |
| 2537 if (flags & GUI_MON_NOCLEAR) | |
| 2538 clip_may_redraw_selection(gui.row, col, len); | |
| 2539 | |
| 2540 if (!(flags & (GUI_MON_IS_CURSOR | GUI_MON_TRS_CURSOR))) | |
| 2541 { | |
| 2542 /* Invalidate the old physical cursor position if we wrote over it */ | |
| 2543 if (gui.cursor_row == gui.row | |
| 2544 && gui.cursor_col >= col | |
| 2545 && gui.cursor_col < col + len) | |
| 2546 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 2547 } | |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 #ifdef FEAT_SIGN_ICONS | |
| 2550 if (draw_sign) | |
| 2551 /* Draw the sign on top of the spaces. */ | |
| 2552 gui_mch_drawsign(gui.row, col, gui.highlight_mask); | |
| 2592 | 2553 # if defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) && (defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) \ |
|
2209
d0ddf7ba1630
Included the patch to support netbeans in a terminal.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2208
diff
changeset
|
2554 || defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W32)) |
| 7 | 2555 if (multi_sign) |
| 2556 netbeans_draw_multisign_indicator(gui.row); | |
| 2557 # endif | |
| 2558 #endif | |
| 2559 | |
| 2560 return OK; | |
| 2561 } | |
| 2562 | |
| 2563 /* | |
| 2564 * Un-draw the cursor. Actually this just redraws the character at the given | |
| 2565 * position. The character just before it too, for when it was in bold. | |
| 2566 */ | |
| 2567 void | |
| 2568 gui_undraw_cursor() | |
| 2569 { | |
| 2570 if (gui.cursor_is_valid) | |
| 2571 { | |
| 2572 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 2573 if (composing_hangul | |
| 2574 && gui.col == gui.cursor_col && gui.row == gui.cursor_row) | |
| 2575 (void)gui_outstr_nowrap(composing_hangul_buffer, 2, | |
| 2576 GUI_MON_IS_CURSOR | GUI_MON_NOCLEAR, | |
| 2577 gui.norm_pixel, gui.back_pixel, 0); | |
| 2578 else | |
| 2579 { | |
| 2580 #endif | |
| 2581 if (gui_redraw_block(gui.cursor_row, gui.cursor_col, | |
| 2582 gui.cursor_row, gui.cursor_col, GUI_MON_NOCLEAR) | |
| 2583 && gui.cursor_col > 0) | |
| 2584 (void)gui_redraw_block(gui.cursor_row, gui.cursor_col - 1, | |
| 2585 gui.cursor_row, gui.cursor_col - 1, GUI_MON_NOCLEAR); | |
| 2586 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 2587 if (composing_hangul) | |
| 2588 (void)gui_redraw_block(gui.cursor_row, gui.cursor_col + 1, | |
| 2589 gui.cursor_row, gui.cursor_col + 1, GUI_MON_NOCLEAR); | |
| 2590 } | |
| 2591 #endif | |
| 2592 /* Cursor_is_valid is reset when the cursor is undrawn, also reset it | |
| 2593 * here in case it wasn't needed to undraw it. */ | |
| 2594 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 2595 } | |
| 2596 } | |
| 2597 | |
| 2598 void | |
| 2599 gui_redraw(x, y, w, h) | |
| 2600 int x; | |
| 2601 int y; | |
| 2602 int w; | |
| 2603 int h; | |
| 2604 { | |
| 2605 int row1, col1, row2, col2; | |
| 2606 | |
| 2607 row1 = Y_2_ROW(y); | |
| 2608 col1 = X_2_COL(x); | |
| 2609 row2 = Y_2_ROW(y + h - 1); | |
| 2610 col2 = X_2_COL(x + w - 1); | |
| 2611 | |
| 2612 (void)gui_redraw_block(row1, col1, row2, col2, GUI_MON_NOCLEAR); | |
| 2613 | |
| 2614 /* | |
| 2615 * We may need to redraw the cursor, but don't take it upon us to change | |
| 2616 * its location after a scroll. | |
| 2617 * (maybe be more strict even and test col too?) | |
| 2618 * These things may be outside the update/clipping region and reality may | |
| 2619 * not reflect Vims internal ideas if these operations are clipped away. | |
| 2620 */ | |
| 2621 if (gui.row == gui.cursor_row) | |
| 2622 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, TRUE); | |
| 2623 } | |
| 2624 | |
| 2625 /* | |
| 2626 * Draw a rectangular block of characters, from row1 to row2 (inclusive) and | |
| 2627 * from col1 to col2 (inclusive). | |
| 2628 * Return TRUE when the character before the first drawn character has | |
| 2629 * different attributes (may have to be redrawn too). | |
| 2630 */ | |
| 2631 int | |
| 2632 gui_redraw_block(row1, col1, row2, col2, flags) | |
| 2633 int row1; | |
| 2634 int col1; | |
| 2635 int row2; | |
| 2636 int col2; | |
| 2637 int flags; /* flags for gui_outstr_nowrap() */ | |
| 2638 { | |
| 2639 int old_row, old_col; | |
| 2640 long_u old_hl_mask; | |
| 2641 int off; | |
| 203 | 2642 sattr_T first_attr; |
| 7 | 2643 int idx, len; |
| 2644 int back, nback; | |
| 2645 int retval = FALSE; | |
| 2646 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2647 int orig_col1, orig_col2; | |
| 2648 #endif | |
| 2649 | |
| 2650 /* Don't try to update when ScreenLines is not valid */ | |
| 2651 if (!screen_cleared || ScreenLines == NULL) | |
| 2652 return retval; | |
| 2653 | |
| 2654 /* Don't try to draw outside the shell! */ | |
| 2655 /* Check everything, strange values may be caused by a big border width */ | |
| 2656 col1 = check_col(col1); | |
| 2657 col2 = check_col(col2); | |
| 2658 row1 = check_row(row1); | |
| 2659 row2 = check_row(row2); | |
| 2660 | |
| 2661 /* Remember where our cursor was */ | |
| 2662 old_row = gui.row; | |
| 2663 old_col = gui.col; | |
| 2664 old_hl_mask = gui.highlight_mask; | |
| 2665 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2666 orig_col1 = col1; | |
| 2667 orig_col2 = col2; | |
| 2668 #endif | |
| 2669 | |
| 2670 for (gui.row = row1; gui.row <= row2; gui.row++) | |
| 2671 { | |
| 2672 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2673 /* When only half of a double-wide character is in the block, include | |
| 2674 * the other half. */ | |
| 2675 col1 = orig_col1; | |
| 2676 col2 = orig_col2; | |
| 2677 off = LineOffset[gui.row]; | |
| 2678 if (enc_dbcs != 0) | |
| 2679 { | |
| 2680 if (col1 > 0) | |
| 2681 col1 -= dbcs_screen_head_off(ScreenLines + off, | |
| 2682 ScreenLines + off + col1); | |
| 2683 col2 += dbcs_screen_tail_off(ScreenLines + off, | |
| 2684 ScreenLines + off + col2); | |
| 2685 } | |
| 2686 else if (enc_utf8) | |
| 2687 { | |
| 2688 if (ScreenLines[off + col1] == 0) | |
| 2689 --col1; | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2690 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 2691 if (col2 + 1 < Columns && ScreenLines[off + col2 + 1] == 0) |
| 2692 ++col2; | |
| 2693 # endif | |
| 2694 } | |
| 2695 #endif | |
| 2696 gui.col = col1; | |
| 2697 off = LineOffset[gui.row] + gui.col; | |
| 2698 len = col2 - col1 + 1; | |
| 2699 | |
| 2700 /* Find how many chars back this highlighting starts, or where a space | |
| 2701 * is. Needed for when the bold trick is used */ | |
| 2702 for (back = 0; back < col1; ++back) | |
| 2703 if (ScreenAttrs[off - 1 - back] != ScreenAttrs[off] | |
| 2704 || ScreenLines[off - 1 - back] == ' ') | |
| 2705 break; | |
| 2706 retval = (col1 > 0 && ScreenAttrs[off - 1] != 0 && back == 0 | |
| 2707 && ScreenLines[off - 1] != ' '); | |
| 2708 | |
| 2709 /* Break it up in strings of characters with the same attributes. */ | |
| 2710 /* Print UTF-8 characters individually. */ | |
| 2711 while (len > 0) | |
| 2712 { | |
| 2713 first_attr = ScreenAttrs[off]; | |
| 2714 gui.highlight_mask = first_attr; | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2715 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 2716 if (enc_utf8 && ScreenLinesUC[off] != 0) |
| 2717 { | |
| 2718 /* output multi-byte character separately */ | |
| 2719 nback = gui_screenchar(off, flags, | |
| 2720 (guicolor_T)0, (guicolor_T)0, back); | |
| 2721 if (gui.col < Columns && ScreenLines[off + 1] == 0) | |
| 2722 idx = 2; | |
| 2723 else | |
| 2724 idx = 1; | |
| 2725 } | |
| 2726 else if (enc_dbcs == DBCS_JPNU && ScreenLines[off] == 0x8e) | |
| 2727 { | |
| 2728 /* output double-byte, single-width character separately */ | |
| 2729 nback = gui_screenchar(off, flags, | |
| 2730 (guicolor_T)0, (guicolor_T)0, back); | |
| 2731 idx = 1; | |
| 2732 } | |
| 2733 else | |
| 2734 #endif | |
| 2735 { | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
2736 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 2737 for (idx = 0; idx < len; ++idx) |
| 2738 { | |
| 2739 if (enc_utf8 && ScreenLines[off + idx] == 0) | |
| 2740 continue; /* skip second half of double-width char */ | |
| 2741 if (ScreenAttrs[off + idx] != first_attr) | |
| 2742 break; | |
| 2743 } | |
| 2744 /* gui_screenstr() takes care of multibyte chars */ | |
| 2745 nback = gui_screenstr(off, idx, flags, | |
| 2746 (guicolor_T)0, (guicolor_T)0, back); | |
| 2747 #else | |
| 2748 for (idx = 0; idx < len && ScreenAttrs[off + idx] == first_attr; | |
| 2749 idx++) | |
| 2750 { | |
| 2751 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 2752 /* Stop at a multi-byte Unicode character. */ | |
| 2753 if (enc_utf8 && ScreenLinesUC[off + idx] != 0) | |
| 2754 break; | |
| 2755 if (enc_dbcs == DBCS_JPNU) | |
| 2756 { | |
| 2757 /* Stop at a double-byte single-width char. */ | |
| 2758 if (ScreenLines[off + idx] == 0x8e) | |
| 2759 break; | |
| 474 | 2760 if (len > 1 && (*mb_ptr2len)(ScreenLines |
| 7 | 2761 + off + idx) == 2) |
| 2762 ++idx; /* skip second byte of double-byte char */ | |
| 2763 } | |
| 2764 # endif | |
| 2765 } | |
| 2766 nback = gui_outstr_nowrap(ScreenLines + off, idx, flags, | |
| 2767 (guicolor_T)0, (guicolor_T)0, back); | |
| 2768 #endif | |
| 2769 } | |
| 2770 if (nback == FAIL) | |
| 2771 { | |
| 2772 /* Must back up to start drawing where a bold or italic word | |
| 2773 * starts. */ | |
| 2774 off -= back; | |
| 2775 len += back; | |
| 2776 gui.col -= back; | |
| 2777 } | |
| 2778 else | |
| 2779 { | |
| 2780 off += idx; | |
| 2781 len -= idx; | |
| 2782 } | |
| 2783 back = 0; | |
| 2784 } | |
| 2785 } | |
| 2786 | |
| 2787 /* Put the cursor back where it was */ | |
| 2788 gui.row = old_row; | |
| 2789 gui.col = old_col; | |
| 835 | 2790 gui.highlight_mask = (int)old_hl_mask; |
| 7 | 2791 |
| 2792 return retval; | |
| 2793 } | |
| 2794 | |
| 2795 static void | |
| 2796 gui_delete_lines(row, count) | |
| 2797 int row; | |
| 2798 int count; | |
| 2799 { | |
| 2800 if (count <= 0) | |
| 2801 return; | |
| 2802 | |
| 2803 if (row + count > gui.scroll_region_bot) | |
| 2804 /* Scrolled out of region, just blank the lines out */ | |
| 2805 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left, | |
| 2806 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
| 2807 else | |
| 2808 { | |
| 2809 gui_mch_delete_lines(row, count); | |
| 2810 | |
| 2811 /* If the cursor was in the deleted lines it's now gone. If the | |
| 2812 * cursor was in the scrolled lines adjust its position. */ | |
| 2813 if (gui.cursor_row >= row | |
| 2814 && gui.cursor_col >= gui.scroll_region_left | |
| 2815 && gui.cursor_col <= gui.scroll_region_right) | |
| 2816 { | |
| 2817 if (gui.cursor_row < row + count) | |
| 2818 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 2819 else if (gui.cursor_row <= gui.scroll_region_bot) | |
| 2820 gui.cursor_row -= count; | |
| 2821 } | |
| 2822 } | |
| 2823 } | |
| 2824 | |
| 2825 static void | |
| 2826 gui_insert_lines(row, count) | |
| 2827 int row; | |
| 2828 int count; | |
| 2829 { | |
| 2830 if (count <= 0) | |
| 2831 return; | |
| 2832 | |
| 2833 if (row + count > gui.scroll_region_bot) | |
| 2834 /* Scrolled out of region, just blank the lines out */ | |
| 2835 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left, | |
| 2836 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
| 2837 else | |
| 2838 { | |
| 2839 gui_mch_insert_lines(row, count); | |
| 2840 | |
| 2841 if (gui.cursor_row >= gui.row | |
| 2842 && gui.cursor_col >= gui.scroll_region_left | |
| 2843 && gui.cursor_col <= gui.scroll_region_right) | |
| 2844 { | |
| 2845 if (gui.cursor_row <= gui.scroll_region_bot - count) | |
| 2846 gui.cursor_row += count; | |
| 2847 else if (gui.cursor_row <= gui.scroll_region_bot) | |
| 2848 gui.cursor_is_valid = FALSE; | |
| 2849 } | |
| 2850 } | |
| 2851 } | |
| 2852 | |
| 2853 /* | |
| 2854 * The main GUI input routine. Waits for a character from the keyboard. | |
| 2855 * wtime == -1 Wait forever. | |
| 2856 * wtime == 0 Don't wait. | |
| 2857 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character. | |
| 2858 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time, | |
| 2859 * or FAIL otherwise. | |
| 2860 */ | |
| 2861 int | |
| 2862 gui_wait_for_chars(wtime) | |
| 2863 long wtime; | |
| 2864 { | |
| 2865 int retval; | |
| 2866 | |
|
2208
495995b9ce7d
Fix: window title not updated after file dropped.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2867 #ifdef FEAT_MENU |
| 7 | 2868 /* |
| 2869 * If we're going to wait a bit, update the menus and mouse shape for the | |
| 2870 * current State. | |
| 2871 */ | |
| 2872 if (wtime != 0) | |
| 2873 gui_update_menus(0); | |
| 2874 #endif | |
| 2875 | |
| 2876 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 2877 if (input_available()) /* Got char, return immediately */ | |
| 2878 return OK; | |
| 2879 if (wtime == 0) /* Don't wait for char */ | |
| 2880 return FAIL; | |
| 2881 | |
| 2882 /* Before waiting, flush any output to the screen. */ | |
| 2883 gui_mch_flush(); | |
| 2884 | |
| 2885 if (wtime > 0) | |
| 2886 { | |
| 2887 /* Blink when waiting for a character. Probably only does something | |
| 2888 * for showmatch() */ | |
| 2889 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 2890 retval = gui_mch_wait_for_chars(wtime); | |
| 2891 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 2892 return retval; | |
| 2893 } | |
| 2894 | |
| 2895 /* | |
| 1199 | 2896 * While we are waiting indefinitely for a character, blink the cursor. |
| 7 | 2897 */ |
| 2898 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 2899 | |
| 203 | 2900 retval = FAIL; |
| 2901 /* | |
| 2902 * We may want to trigger the CursorHold event. First wait for | |
| 2903 * 'updatetime' and if nothing is typed within that time put the | |
| 2904 * K_CURSORHOLD key in the input buffer. | |
| 2905 */ | |
| 2906 if (gui_mch_wait_for_chars(p_ut) == OK) | |
| 2907 retval = OK; | |
| 7 | 2908 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD |
| 609 | 2909 else if (trigger_cursorhold()) |
| 7 | 2910 { |
| 203 | 2911 char_u buf[3]; |
| 2912 | |
| 2913 /* Put K_CURSORHOLD in the input buffer. */ | |
| 2914 buf[0] = CSI; | |
| 2915 buf[1] = KS_EXTRA; | |
| 2916 buf[2] = (int)KE_CURSORHOLD; | |
| 2917 add_to_input_buf(buf, 3); | |
| 2918 | |
| 2919 retval = OK; | |
| 2920 } | |
| 2921 #endif | |
| 2922 | |
| 2923 if (retval == FAIL) | |
| 2924 { | |
| 2925 /* Blocking wait. */ | |
| 368 | 2926 before_blocking(); |
| 7 | 2927 retval = gui_mch_wait_for_chars(-1L); |
| 2928 } | |
| 2929 | |
| 2930 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 2931 return retval; | |
| 2932 } | |
| 2933 | |
| 2934 /* | |
| 1137 | 2935 * Fill p[4] with mouse coordinates encoded for check_termcode(). |
| 7 | 2936 */ |
| 2937 static void | |
| 2938 fill_mouse_coord(p, col, row) | |
| 2939 char_u *p; | |
| 2940 int col; | |
| 2941 int row; | |
| 2942 { | |
| 2943 p[0] = (char_u)(col / 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 2944 p[1] = (char_u)(col % 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 2945 p[2] = (char_u)(row / 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 2946 p[3] = (char_u)(row % 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 2947 } | |
| 2948 | |
| 2949 /* | |
| 2950 * Generic mouse support function. Add a mouse event to the input buffer with | |
| 2951 * the given properties. | |
| 2952 * button --- may be any of MOUSE_LEFT, MOUSE_MIDDLE, MOUSE_RIGHT, | |
| 2953 * MOUSE_X1, MOUSE_X2 | |
| 2954 * MOUSE_DRAG, or MOUSE_RELEASE. | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
2955 * MOUSE_4 and MOUSE_5 are used for vertical scroll wheel, |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
2956 * MOUSE_6 and MOUSE_7 for horizontal scroll wheel. |
| 7 | 2957 * x, y --- Coordinates of mouse in pixels. |
| 2958 * repeated_click --- TRUE if this click comes only a short time after a | |
| 2959 * previous click. | |
| 2960 * modifiers --- Bit field which may be any of the following modifiers | |
| 2961 * or'ed together: MOUSE_SHIFT | MOUSE_CTRL | MOUSE_ALT. | |
| 2962 * This function will ignore drag events where the mouse has not moved to a new | |
| 2963 * character. | |
| 2964 */ | |
| 2965 void | |
| 2966 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, modifiers) | |
| 2967 int button; | |
| 2968 int x; | |
| 2969 int y; | |
| 2970 int repeated_click; | |
| 2971 int_u modifiers; | |
| 2972 { | |
| 2973 static int prev_row = 0, prev_col = 0; | |
| 2974 static int prev_button = -1; | |
| 2975 static int num_clicks = 1; | |
| 2976 char_u string[10]; | |
| 2977 enum key_extra button_char; | |
| 2978 int row, col; | |
| 2979 #ifdef FEAT_CLIPBOARD | |
| 2980 int checkfor; | |
| 2981 int did_clip = FALSE; | |
| 2982 #endif | |
| 2983 | |
| 2984 /* | |
| 2985 * Scrolling may happen at any time, also while a selection is present. | |
| 2986 */ | |
| 2987 switch (button) | |
| 2988 { | |
| 2989 case MOUSE_X1: | |
| 2990 button_char = KE_X1MOUSE; | |
| 2991 goto button_set; | |
| 2992 case MOUSE_X2: | |
| 2993 button_char = KE_X2MOUSE; | |
| 2994 goto button_set; | |
| 2995 case MOUSE_4: | |
| 2996 button_char = KE_MOUSEDOWN; | |
| 2997 goto button_set; | |
| 2998 case MOUSE_5: | |
| 2999 button_char = KE_MOUSEUP; | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
3000 goto button_set; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
3001 case MOUSE_6: |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
3002 button_char = KE_MOUSELEFT; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
3003 goto button_set; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
3004 case MOUSE_7: |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
3005 button_char = KE_MOUSERIGHT; |
| 7 | 3006 button_set: |
| 3007 { | |
| 3008 /* Don't put events in the input queue now. */ | |
| 3009 if (hold_gui_events) | |
| 3010 return; | |
| 3011 | |
| 3012 string[3] = CSI; | |
| 3013 string[4] = KS_EXTRA; | |
| 3014 string[5] = (int)button_char; | |
| 3015 | |
| 3016 /* Pass the pointer coordinates of the scroll event so that we | |
| 3017 * know which window to scroll. */ | |
| 3018 row = gui_xy2colrow(x, y, &col); | |
| 3019 string[6] = (char_u)(col / 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 3020 string[7] = (char_u)(col % 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 3021 string[8] = (char_u)(row / 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 3022 string[9] = (char_u)(row % 128 + ' ' + 1); | |
| 3023 | |
| 3024 if (modifiers == 0) | |
| 3025 add_to_input_buf(string + 3, 7); | |
| 3026 else | |
| 3027 { | |
| 3028 string[0] = CSI; | |
| 3029 string[1] = KS_MODIFIER; | |
| 3030 string[2] = 0; | |
| 3031 if (modifiers & MOUSE_SHIFT) | |
| 3032 string[2] |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT; | |
| 3033 if (modifiers & MOUSE_CTRL) | |
| 3034 string[2] |= MOD_MASK_CTRL; | |
| 3035 if (modifiers & MOUSE_ALT) | |
| 3036 string[2] |= MOD_MASK_ALT; | |
| 3037 add_to_input_buf(string, 10); | |
| 3038 } | |
| 3039 return; | |
| 3040 } | |
| 3041 } | |
| 3042 | |
| 3043 #ifdef FEAT_CLIPBOARD | |
| 3044 /* If a clipboard selection is in progress, handle it */ | |
| 3045 if (clip_star.state == SELECT_IN_PROGRESS) | |
| 3046 { | |
| 3047 clip_process_selection(button, X_2_COL(x), Y_2_ROW(y), repeated_click); | |
| 3048 return; | |
| 3049 } | |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 /* Determine which mouse settings to look for based on the current mode */ | |
| 3052 switch (get_real_state()) | |
| 3053 { | |
| 3054 case NORMAL_BUSY: | |
| 3055 case OP_PENDING: | |
| 3056 case NORMAL: checkfor = MOUSE_NORMAL; break; | |
| 3057 case VISUAL: checkfor = MOUSE_VISUAL; break; | |
| 788 | 3058 case SELECTMODE: checkfor = MOUSE_VISUAL; break; |
| 7 | 3059 case REPLACE: |
| 3060 case REPLACE+LANGMAP: | |
| 3061 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE | |
| 3062 case VREPLACE: | |
| 3063 case VREPLACE+LANGMAP: | |
| 3064 #endif | |
| 3065 case INSERT: | |
| 3066 case INSERT+LANGMAP: checkfor = MOUSE_INSERT; break; | |
| 3067 case ASKMORE: | |
| 3068 case HITRETURN: /* At the more- and hit-enter prompt pass the | |
| 3069 mouse event for a click on or below the | |
| 3070 message line. */ | |
| 3071 if (Y_2_ROW(y) >= msg_row) | |
| 3072 checkfor = MOUSE_NORMAL; | |
| 3073 else | |
| 3074 checkfor = MOUSE_RETURN; | |
| 3075 break; | |
| 3076 | |
| 3077 /* | |
| 3078 * On the command line, use the clipboard selection on all lines | |
| 3079 * but the command line. But not when pasting. | |
| 3080 */ | |
| 3081 case CMDLINE: | |
| 3082 case CMDLINE+LANGMAP: | |
| 3083 if (Y_2_ROW(y) < cmdline_row && button != MOUSE_MIDDLE) | |
| 3084 checkfor = MOUSE_NONE; | |
| 3085 else | |
| 3086 checkfor = MOUSE_COMMAND; | |
| 3087 break; | |
| 3088 | |
| 3089 default: | |
| 3090 checkfor = MOUSE_NONE; | |
| 3091 break; | |
| 3092 }; | |
| 3093 | |
| 3094 /* | |
| 3095 * Allow clipboard selection of text on the command line in "normal" | |
| 3096 * modes. Don't do this when dragging the status line, or extending a | |
| 3097 * Visual selection. | |
| 3098 */ | |
| 3099 if ((State == NORMAL || State == NORMAL_BUSY || (State & INSERT)) | |
| 3100 && Y_2_ROW(y) >= topframe->fr_height | |
| 995 | 3101 # ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 3102 + firstwin->w_winrow | |
| 3103 # endif | |
| 7 | 3104 && button != MOUSE_DRAG |
| 3105 # ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
| 3106 && !drag_status_line | |
| 3107 # ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 3108 && !drag_sep_line | |
| 3109 # endif | |
| 3110 # endif | |
| 3111 ) | |
| 3112 checkfor = MOUSE_NONE; | |
| 3113 | |
| 3114 /* | |
| 3115 * Use modeless selection when holding CTRL and SHIFT pressed. | |
| 3116 */ | |
| 3117 if ((modifiers & MOUSE_CTRL) && (modifiers & MOUSE_SHIFT)) | |
| 3118 checkfor = MOUSE_NONEF; | |
| 3119 | |
| 3120 /* | |
| 3121 * In Ex mode, always use modeless selection. | |
| 3122 */ | |
| 3123 if (exmode_active) | |
| 3124 checkfor = MOUSE_NONE; | |
| 3125 | |
| 3126 /* | |
| 3127 * If the mouse settings say to not use the mouse, use the modeless | |
| 3128 * selection. But if Visual is active, assume that only the Visual area | |
| 3129 * will be selected. | |
| 3130 * Exception: On the command line, both the selection is used and a mouse | |
| 3131 * key is send. | |
| 3132 */ | |
| 3133 if (!mouse_has(checkfor) || checkfor == MOUSE_COMMAND) | |
| 3134 { | |
| 3135 #ifdef FEAT_VISUAL | |
| 3136 /* Don't do modeless selection in Visual mode. */ | |
| 3137 if (checkfor != MOUSE_NONEF && VIsual_active && (State & NORMAL)) | |
| 3138 return; | |
| 3139 #endif | |
| 3140 | |
| 3141 /* | |
| 3142 * When 'mousemodel' is "popup", shift-left is translated to right. | |
| 3143 * But not when also using Ctrl. | |
| 3144 */ | |
| 3145 if (mouse_model_popup() && button == MOUSE_LEFT | |
| 3146 && (modifiers & MOUSE_SHIFT) && !(modifiers & MOUSE_CTRL)) | |
| 3147 { | |
| 3148 button = MOUSE_RIGHT; | |
| 3149 modifiers &= ~ MOUSE_SHIFT; | |
| 3150 } | |
| 3151 | |
| 3152 /* If the selection is done, allow the right button to extend it. | |
| 3153 * If the selection is cleared, allow the right button to start it | |
| 3154 * from the cursor position. */ | |
| 3155 if (button == MOUSE_RIGHT) | |
| 3156 { | |
| 3157 if (clip_star.state == SELECT_CLEARED) | |
| 3158 { | |
| 3159 if (State & CMDLINE) | |
| 3160 { | |
| 3161 col = msg_col; | |
| 3162 row = msg_row; | |
| 3163 } | |
| 3164 else | |
| 3165 { | |
| 3166 col = curwin->w_wcol; | |
| 3167 row = curwin->w_wrow + W_WINROW(curwin); | |
| 3168 } | |
| 3169 clip_start_selection(col, row, FALSE); | |
| 3170 } | |
| 3171 clip_process_selection(button, X_2_COL(x), Y_2_ROW(y), | |
| 3172 repeated_click); | |
| 3173 did_clip = TRUE; | |
| 3174 } | |
| 3175 /* Allow the left button to start the selection */ | |
| 2823 | 3176 else if (button == MOUSE_LEFT) |
| 7 | 3177 { |
| 3178 clip_start_selection(X_2_COL(x), Y_2_ROW(y), repeated_click); | |
| 3179 did_clip = TRUE; | |
| 3180 } | |
| 3181 | |
| 3182 /* Always allow pasting */ | |
| 3183 if (button != MOUSE_MIDDLE) | |
| 3184 { | |
| 3185 if (!mouse_has(checkfor) || button == MOUSE_RELEASE) | |
| 3186 return; | |
| 3187 if (checkfor != MOUSE_COMMAND) | |
| 3188 button = MOUSE_LEFT; | |
| 3189 } | |
| 3190 repeated_click = FALSE; | |
| 3191 } | |
| 3192 | |
| 3193 if (clip_star.state != SELECT_CLEARED && !did_clip) | |
| 3674 | 3194 clip_clear_selection(&clip_star); |
| 7 | 3195 #endif |
| 3196 | |
| 3197 /* Don't put events in the input queue now. */ | |
| 3198 if (hold_gui_events) | |
| 3199 return; | |
| 3200 | |
| 3201 row = gui_xy2colrow(x, y, &col); | |
| 3202 | |
| 3203 /* | |
| 3204 * If we are dragging and the mouse hasn't moved far enough to be on a | |
| 3205 * different character, then don't send an event to vim. | |
| 3206 */ | |
| 3207 if (button == MOUSE_DRAG) | |
| 3208 { | |
| 3209 if (row == prev_row && col == prev_col) | |
| 3210 return; | |
| 3211 /* Dragging above the window, set "row" to -1 to cause a scroll. */ | |
| 3212 if (y < 0) | |
| 3213 row = -1; | |
| 3214 } | |
| 3215 | |
| 3216 /* | |
| 3217 * If topline has changed (window scrolled) since the last click, reset | |
| 3218 * repeated_click, because we don't want starting Visual mode when | |
| 3219 * clicking on a different character in the text. | |
| 3220 */ | |
| 3221 if (curwin->w_topline != gui_prev_topline | |
| 3222 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF | |
| 3223 || curwin->w_topfill != gui_prev_topfill | |
| 3224 #endif | |
| 3225 ) | |
| 3226 repeated_click = FALSE; | |
| 3227 | |
| 3228 string[0] = CSI; /* this sequence is recognized by check_termcode() */ | |
| 3229 string[1] = KS_MOUSE; | |
| 3230 string[2] = KE_FILLER; | |
| 3231 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG && button != MOUSE_RELEASE) | |
| 3232 { | |
| 3233 if (repeated_click) | |
| 3234 { | |
| 3235 /* | |
| 3236 * Handle multiple clicks. They only count if the mouse is still | |
| 3237 * pointing at the same character. | |
| 3238 */ | |
| 3239 if (button != prev_button || row != prev_row || col != prev_col) | |
| 3240 num_clicks = 1; | |
| 3241 else if (++num_clicks > 4) | |
| 3242 num_clicks = 1; | |
| 3243 } | |
| 3244 else | |
| 3245 num_clicks = 1; | |
| 3246 prev_button = button; | |
| 3247 gui_prev_topline = curwin->w_topline; | |
| 3248 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF | |
| 3249 gui_prev_topfill = curwin->w_topfill; | |
| 3250 #endif | |
| 3251 | |
| 3252 string[3] = (char_u)(button | 0x20); | |
| 3253 SET_NUM_MOUSE_CLICKS(string[3], num_clicks); | |
| 3254 } | |
| 3255 else | |
| 3256 string[3] = (char_u)button; | |
| 3257 | |
| 3258 string[3] |= modifiers; | |
| 3259 fill_mouse_coord(string + 4, col, row); | |
| 3260 add_to_input_buf(string, 8); | |
| 3261 | |
| 3262 if (row < 0) | |
| 3263 prev_row = 0; | |
| 3264 else | |
| 3265 prev_row = row; | |
| 3266 prev_col = col; | |
| 3267 | |
| 3268 /* | |
| 3269 * We need to make sure this is cleared since Athena doesn't tell us when | |
| 3270 * he is done dragging. Neither does GTK+ 2 -- at least for now. | |
| 3271 */ | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
3272 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_ATHENA) || defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 3273 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_NONE; |
| 3274 #endif | |
| 3275 } | |
| 3276 | |
| 3277 /* | |
| 3278 * Convert x and y coordinate to column and row in text window. | |
| 3279 * Corrects for multi-byte character. | |
| 3280 * returns column in "*colp" and row as return value; | |
| 3281 */ | |
| 3282 int | |
| 3283 gui_xy2colrow(x, y, colp) | |
| 3284 int x; | |
| 3285 int y; | |
| 3286 int *colp; | |
| 3287 { | |
| 3288 int col = check_col(X_2_COL(x)); | |
| 3289 int row = check_row(Y_2_ROW(y)); | |
| 3290 | |
| 3291 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 3292 *colp = mb_fix_col(col, row); | |
| 3293 #else | |
| 3294 *colp = col; | |
| 3295 #endif | |
| 3296 return row; | |
| 3297 } | |
| 3298 | |
| 3299 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 3300 /* | |
| 3301 * Callback function for when a menu entry has been selected. | |
| 3302 */ | |
| 3303 void | |
| 3304 gui_menu_cb(menu) | |
| 3305 vimmenu_T *menu; | |
| 3306 { | |
| 664 | 3307 char_u bytes[sizeof(long_u)]; |
| 7 | 3308 |
| 3309 /* Don't put events in the input queue now. */ | |
| 3310 if (hold_gui_events) | |
| 3311 return; | |
| 3312 | |
| 3313 bytes[0] = CSI; | |
| 3314 bytes[1] = KS_MENU; | |
| 3315 bytes[2] = KE_FILLER; | |
| 664 | 3316 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3); |
| 3317 add_long_to_buf((long_u)menu, bytes); | |
| 3318 add_to_input_buf_csi(bytes, sizeof(long_u)); | |
| 7 | 3319 } |
| 3320 #endif | |
| 3321 | |
| 811 | 3322 static int prev_which_scrollbars[3]; |
| 669 | 3323 |
| 7 | 3324 /* |
| 3325 * Set which components are present. | |
| 685 | 3326 * If "oldval" is not NULL, "oldval" is the previous value, the new value is |
| 7 | 3327 * in p_go. |
| 3328 */ | |
| 3329 void | |
| 3330 gui_init_which_components(oldval) | |
| 1887 | 3331 char_u *oldval UNUSED; |
| 7 | 3332 { |
| 3333 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 3334 static int prev_menu_is_active = -1; | |
| 3335 #endif | |
| 3336 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3337 static int prev_toolbar = -1; | |
| 3338 int using_toolbar = FALSE; | |
| 3339 #endif | |
| 685 | 3340 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
| 3341 int using_tabline; | |
| 3342 #endif | |
| 7 | 3343 #ifdef FEAT_FOOTER |
| 3344 static int prev_footer = -1; | |
| 3345 int using_footer = FALSE; | |
| 3346 #endif | |
| 3347 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) && !defined(WIN16) | |
| 3348 static int prev_tearoff = -1; | |
| 3349 int using_tearoff = FALSE; | |
| 3350 #endif | |
| 3351 | |
| 3352 char_u *p; | |
| 3353 int i; | |
| 3354 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 3355 int grey_old, grey_new; | |
| 3356 char_u *temp; | |
| 3357 #endif | |
| 3358 win_T *wp; | |
| 3359 int need_set_size; | |
| 3360 int fix_size; | |
| 3361 | |
| 3362 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 3363 if (oldval != NULL && gui.in_use) | |
| 3364 { | |
| 3365 /* | |
| 3366 * Check if the menu's go from grey to non-grey or vise versa. | |
| 3367 */ | |
| 3368 grey_old = (vim_strchr(oldval, GO_GREY) != NULL); | |
| 3369 grey_new = (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_GREY) != NULL); | |
| 3370 if (grey_old != grey_new) | |
| 3371 { | |
| 3372 temp = p_go; | |
| 3373 p_go = oldval; | |
| 3374 gui_update_menus(MENU_ALL_MODES); | |
| 3375 p_go = temp; | |
| 3376 } | |
| 3377 } | |
| 3378 gui.menu_is_active = FALSE; | |
| 3379 #endif | |
| 3380 | |
| 3381 for (i = 0; i < 3; i++) | |
| 3382 gui.which_scrollbars[i] = FALSE; | |
| 3383 for (p = p_go; *p; p++) | |
| 3384 switch (*p) | |
| 3385 { | |
| 3386 case GO_LEFT: | |
| 3387 gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] = TRUE; | |
| 3388 break; | |
| 3389 case GO_RIGHT: | |
| 3390 gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT] = TRUE; | |
| 3391 break; | |
| 3392 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 3393 case GO_VLEFT: | |
| 3394 if (win_hasvertsplit()) | |
| 3395 gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] = TRUE; | |
| 3396 break; | |
| 3397 case GO_VRIGHT: | |
| 3398 if (win_hasvertsplit()) | |
| 3399 gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT] = TRUE; | |
| 3400 break; | |
| 3401 #endif | |
| 3402 case GO_BOT: | |
| 3403 gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_BOTTOM] = TRUE; | |
| 3404 break; | |
| 3405 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 3406 case GO_MENUS: | |
| 3407 gui.menu_is_active = TRUE; | |
| 3408 break; | |
| 3409 #endif | |
| 3410 case GO_GREY: | |
| 3411 /* make menu's have grey items, ignored here */ | |
| 3412 break; | |
| 3413 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3414 case GO_TOOLBAR: | |
| 3415 using_toolbar = TRUE; | |
| 3416 break; | |
| 3417 #endif | |
| 3418 #ifdef FEAT_FOOTER | |
| 3419 case GO_FOOTER: | |
| 3420 using_footer = TRUE; | |
| 3421 break; | |
| 3422 #endif | |
| 3423 case GO_TEAROFF: | |
| 3424 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) && !defined(WIN16) | |
| 3425 using_tearoff = TRUE; | |
| 3426 #endif | |
| 3427 break; | |
| 3428 default: | |
| 3429 /* Ignore options that are not supported */ | |
| 3430 break; | |
| 3431 } | |
| 685 | 3432 |
| 7 | 3433 if (gui.in_use) |
| 3434 { | |
| 811 | 3435 need_set_size = 0; |
| 7 | 3436 fix_size = FALSE; |
| 685 | 3437 |
| 3438 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
| 687 | 3439 /* Update the GUI tab line, it may appear or disappear. This may |
| 3440 * cause the non-GUI tab line to disappear or appear. */ | |
| 685 | 3441 using_tabline = gui_has_tabline(); |
| 706 | 3442 if (!gui_mch_showing_tabline() != !using_tabline) |
| 685 | 3443 { |
| 797 | 3444 /* We don't want a resize event change "Rows" here, save and |
| 3445 * restore it. Resizing is handled below. */ | |
| 3446 i = Rows; | |
| 685 | 3447 gui_update_tabline(); |
| 797 | 3448 Rows = i; |
| 1767 | 3449 need_set_size |= RESIZE_VERT; |
| 685 | 3450 if (using_tabline) |
| 3451 fix_size = TRUE; | |
| 3452 if (!gui_use_tabline()) | |
| 3453 redraw_tabline = TRUE; /* may draw non-GUI tab line */ | |
| 3454 } | |
| 3455 #endif | |
| 3456 | |
| 7 | 3457 for (i = 0; i < 3; i++) |
| 3458 { | |
| 811 | 3459 /* The scrollbar needs to be updated when it is shown/unshown and |
| 3460 * when switching tab pages. But the size only changes when it's | |
| 3461 * shown/unshown. Thus we need two places to remember whether a | |
| 3462 * scrollbar is there or not. */ | |
| 3463 if (gui.which_scrollbars[i] != prev_which_scrollbars[i] | |
| 788 | 3464 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 811 | 3465 || gui.which_scrollbars[i] |
| 3466 != curtab->tp_prev_which_scrollbars[i] | |
| 788 | 3467 #endif |
| 3468 ) | |
| 7 | 3469 { |
| 3470 if (i == SBAR_BOTTOM) | |
| 3471 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(&gui.bottom_sbar, | |
| 3472 gui.which_scrollbars[i]); | |
| 3473 else | |
| 3474 { | |
| 3475 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) | |
| 3476 { | |
| 3477 gui_do_scrollbar(wp, i, gui.which_scrollbars[i]); | |
| 3478 } | |
| 3479 } | |
| 811 | 3480 if (gui.which_scrollbars[i] != prev_which_scrollbars[i]) |
| 3481 { | |
| 3482 if (i == SBAR_BOTTOM) | |
| 1767 | 3483 need_set_size |= RESIZE_VERT; |
| 811 | 3484 else |
| 1767 | 3485 need_set_size |= RESIZE_HOR; |
| 811 | 3486 if (gui.which_scrollbars[i]) |
| 3487 fix_size = TRUE; | |
| 3488 } | |
| 7 | 3489 } |
| 788 | 3490 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 811 | 3491 curtab->tp_prev_which_scrollbars[i] = gui.which_scrollbars[i]; |
| 788 | 3492 #endif |
| 811 | 3493 prev_which_scrollbars[i] = gui.which_scrollbars[i]; |
| 7 | 3494 } |
| 3495 | |
| 3496 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 3497 if (gui.menu_is_active != prev_menu_is_active) | |
| 3498 { | |
| 3499 /* We don't want a resize event change "Rows" here, save and | |
| 3500 * restore it. Resizing is handled below. */ | |
| 3501 i = Rows; | |
| 3502 gui_mch_enable_menu(gui.menu_is_active); | |
| 3503 Rows = i; | |
| 3504 prev_menu_is_active = gui.menu_is_active; | |
| 1767 | 3505 need_set_size |= RESIZE_VERT; |
| 7 | 3506 if (gui.menu_is_active) |
| 3507 fix_size = TRUE; | |
| 3508 } | |
| 3509 #endif | |
| 3510 | |
| 3511 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3512 if (using_toolbar != prev_toolbar) | |
| 3513 { | |
| 3514 gui_mch_show_toolbar(using_toolbar); | |
| 3515 prev_toolbar = using_toolbar; | |
| 1767 | 3516 need_set_size |= RESIZE_VERT; |
| 7 | 3517 if (using_toolbar) |
| 3518 fix_size = TRUE; | |
| 3519 } | |
| 3520 #endif | |
| 3521 #ifdef FEAT_FOOTER | |
| 3522 if (using_footer != prev_footer) | |
| 3523 { | |
| 3524 gui_mch_enable_footer(using_footer); | |
| 3525 prev_footer = using_footer; | |
| 1767 | 3526 need_set_size |= RESIZE_VERT; |
| 7 | 3527 if (using_footer) |
| 3528 fix_size = TRUE; | |
| 3529 } | |
| 3530 #endif | |
| 3531 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) && !defined(WIN16) && !(defined(WIN3264) && !defined(FEAT_TEAROFF)) | |
| 3532 if (using_tearoff != prev_tearoff) | |
| 3533 { | |
| 3534 gui_mch_toggle_tearoffs(using_tearoff); | |
| 3535 prev_tearoff = using_tearoff; | |
| 3536 } | |
| 3537 #endif | |
| 1767 | 3538 if (need_set_size != 0) |
| 276 | 3539 { |
| 3540 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 1767 | 3541 long prev_Columns = Columns; |
| 3542 long prev_Rows = Rows; | |
| 276 | 3543 #endif |
| 7 | 3544 /* Adjust the size of the window to make the text area keep the |
| 3545 * same size and to avoid that part of our window is off-screen | |
| 3546 * and a scrollbar can't be used, for example. */ | |
| 811 | 3547 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, fix_size, need_set_size); |
| 276 | 3548 |
| 3549 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 3550 /* GTK has the annoying habit of sending us resize events when | |
| 3551 * changing the window size ourselves. This mostly happens when | |
| 3552 * waiting for a character to arrive, quite unpredictably, and may | |
| 3553 * change Columns and Rows when we don't want it. Wait for a | |
| 3554 * character here to avoid this effect. | |
| 3555 * If you remove this, please test this command for resizing | |
| 292 | 3556 * effects (with optional left scrollbar): ":vsp|q|vsp|q|vsp|q". |
| 687 | 3557 * Don't do this while starting up though. |
| 1767 | 3558 * Don't change Rows when adding menu/toolbar/tabline. |
| 3559 * Don't change Columns when adding vertical toolbar. */ | |
| 3560 if (!gui.starting && need_set_size != (RESIZE_VERT | RESIZE_HOR)) | |
| 287 | 3561 (void)char_avail(); |
| 1767 | 3562 if ((need_set_size & RESIZE_VERT) == 0) |
| 3563 Rows = prev_Rows; | |
| 3564 if ((need_set_size & RESIZE_HOR) == 0) | |
| 3565 Columns = prev_Columns; | |
| 276 | 3566 #endif |
| 3567 } | |
| 687 | 3568 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 3569 /* When the console tabline appears or disappears the window positions | |
| 3570 * change. */ | |
| 3571 if (firstwin->w_winrow != tabline_height()) | |
| 3572 shell_new_rows(); /* recompute window positions and heights */ | |
| 3573 #endif | |
| 7 | 3574 } |
| 3575 } | |
| 3576 | |
| 685 | 3577 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO) |
| 3578 /* | |
| 3579 * Return TRUE if the GUI is taking care of the tabline. | |
| 3580 * It may still be hidden if 'showtabline' is zero. | |
| 3581 */ | |
| 3582 int | |
| 3583 gui_use_tabline() | |
| 3584 { | |
| 3585 return gui.in_use && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TABLINE) != NULL; | |
| 3586 } | |
| 3587 | |
| 3588 /* | |
| 3589 * Return TRUE if the GUI is showing the tabline. | |
| 3590 * This uses 'showtabline'. | |
| 3591 */ | |
| 3592 static int | |
| 3593 gui_has_tabline() | |
| 3594 { | |
| 3595 if (!gui_use_tabline() | |
| 3596 || p_stal == 0 | |
| 3597 || (p_stal == 1 && first_tabpage->tp_next == NULL)) | |
| 3598 return FALSE; | |
| 3599 return TRUE; | |
| 3600 } | |
| 3601 | |
| 3602 /* | |
| 3603 * Update the tabline. | |
| 3604 * This may display/undisplay the tabline and update the labels. | |
| 3605 */ | |
| 3606 void | |
| 3607 gui_update_tabline() | |
| 3608 { | |
| 3609 int showit = gui_has_tabline(); | |
| 797 | 3610 int shown = gui_mch_showing_tabline(); |
| 685 | 3611 |
| 3612 if (!gui.starting && starting == 0) | |
| 3613 { | |
| 848 | 3614 /* Updating the tabline uses direct GUI commands, flush |
| 3615 * outstanding instructions first. (esp. clear screen) */ | |
| 3616 out_flush(); | |
| 3617 gui_mch_flush(); | |
| 3618 | |
| 797 | 3619 if (!showit != !shown) |
| 3620 gui_mch_show_tabline(showit); | |
| 685 | 3621 if (showit != 0) |
| 3622 gui_mch_update_tabline(); | |
| 797 | 3623 |
| 3624 /* When the tabs change from hidden to shown or from shown to | |
| 3625 * hidden the size of the text area should remain the same. */ | |
| 3626 if (!showit != !shown) | |
| 811 | 3627 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, showit, RESIZE_VERT); |
| 685 | 3628 } |
| 3629 } | |
| 3630 | |
| 3631 /* | |
| 839 | 3632 * Get the label or tooltip for tab page "tp" into NameBuff[]. |
| 685 | 3633 */ |
| 3634 void | |
| 839 | 3635 get_tabline_label(tp, tooltip) |
| 685 | 3636 tabpage_T *tp; |
| 839 | 3637 int tooltip; /* TRUE: get tooltip */ |
| 685 | 3638 { |
| 3639 int modified = FALSE; | |
| 3640 char_u buf[40]; | |
| 3641 int wincount; | |
| 3642 win_T *wp; | |
| 857 | 3643 char_u **opt; |
| 839 | 3644 |
| 3645 /* Use 'guitablabel' or 'guitabtooltip' if it's set. */ | |
| 857 | 3646 opt = (tooltip ? &p_gtt : &p_gtl); |
| 3647 if (**opt != NUL) | |
| 685 | 3648 { |
| 687 | 3649 int use_sandbox = FALSE; |
| 3650 int save_called_emsg = called_emsg; | |
| 3651 char_u res[MAXPATHL]; | |
| 706 | 3652 tabpage_T *save_curtab; |
| 839 | 3653 char_u *opt_name = (char_u *)(tooltip ? "guitabtooltip" |
| 3654 : "guitablabel"); | |
| 687 | 3655 |
| 3656 called_emsg = FALSE; | |
| 3657 | |
| 3658 printer_page_num = tabpage_index(tp); | |
| 3659 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL | |
| 3660 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, printer_page_num); | |
| 839 | 3661 use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely(opt_name, 0); |
| 687 | 3662 # endif |
| 706 | 3663 /* It's almost as going to the tabpage, but without autocommands. */ |
| 3664 curtab->tp_firstwin = firstwin; | |
| 3665 curtab->tp_lastwin = lastwin; | |
| 3666 curtab->tp_curwin = curwin; | |
| 3667 save_curtab = curtab; | |
| 3668 curtab = tp; | |
| 3669 topframe = curtab->tp_topframe; | |
| 3670 firstwin = curtab->tp_firstwin; | |
| 3671 lastwin = curtab->tp_lastwin; | |
| 3672 curwin = curtab->tp_curwin; | |
| 3673 curbuf = curwin->w_buffer; | |
| 3674 | |
| 687 | 3675 /* Can't use NameBuff directly, build_stl_str_hl() uses it. */ |
| 857 | 3676 build_stl_str_hl(curwin, res, MAXPATHL, *opt, use_sandbox, |
| 706 | 3677 0, (int)Columns, NULL, NULL); |
| 687 | 3678 STRCPY(NameBuff, res); |
| 3679 | |
| 706 | 3680 /* Back to the original curtab. */ |
| 3681 curtab = save_curtab; | |
| 3682 topframe = curtab->tp_topframe; | |
| 3683 firstwin = curtab->tp_firstwin; | |
| 3684 lastwin = curtab->tp_lastwin; | |
| 3685 curwin = curtab->tp_curwin; | |
| 3686 curbuf = curwin->w_buffer; | |
| 3687 | |
| 687 | 3688 if (called_emsg) |
| 839 | 3689 set_string_option_direct(opt_name, -1, |
| 694 | 3690 (char_u *)"", OPT_FREE, SID_ERROR); |
| 687 | 3691 called_emsg |= save_called_emsg; |
| 3692 } | |
| 857 | 3693 |
| 3694 /* If 'guitablabel'/'guitabtooltip' is not set or the result is empty then | |
| 3695 * use a default label. */ | |
| 3696 if (**opt == NUL || *NameBuff == NUL) | |
| 687 | 3697 { |
| 819 | 3698 /* Get the buffer name into NameBuff[] and shorten it. */ |
| 687 | 3699 get_trans_bufname(tp == curtab ? curbuf : tp->tp_curwin->w_buffer); |
| 839 | 3700 if (!tooltip) |
| 3701 shorten_dir(NameBuff); | |
| 687 | 3702 |
| 3703 wp = (tp == curtab) ? firstwin : tp->tp_firstwin; | |
| 3704 for (wincount = 0; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next, ++wincount) | |
| 3705 if (bufIsChanged(wp->w_buffer)) | |
| 3706 modified = TRUE; | |
| 3707 if (modified || wincount > 1) | |
| 3708 { | |
| 3709 if (wincount > 1) | |
| 3710 vim_snprintf((char *)buf, sizeof(buf), "%d", wincount); | |
| 3711 else | |
| 3712 buf[0] = NUL; | |
| 3713 if (modified) | |
| 3714 STRCAT(buf, "+"); | |
| 3715 STRCAT(buf, " "); | |
| 1620 | 3716 STRMOVE(NameBuff + STRLEN(buf), NameBuff); |
| 687 | 3717 mch_memmove(NameBuff, buf, STRLEN(buf)); |
| 3718 } | |
| 685 | 3719 } |
| 3720 } | |
| 3721 | |
| 691 | 3722 /* |
| 3723 * Send the event for clicking to select tab page "nr". | |
| 3724 * Returns TRUE if it was done, FALSE when skipped because we are already at | |
| 838 | 3725 * that tab page or the cmdline window is open. |
| 691 | 3726 */ |
| 3727 int | |
| 3728 send_tabline_event(nr) | |
| 3729 int nr; | |
| 3730 { | |
| 3731 char_u string[3]; | |
| 3732 | |
| 3733 if (nr == tabpage_index(curtab)) | |
| 3734 return FALSE; | |
| 844 | 3735 |
| 3736 /* Don't put events in the input queue now. */ | |
| 3737 if (hold_gui_events | |
| 838 | 3738 # ifdef FEAT_CMDWIN |
| 844 | 3739 || cmdwin_type != 0 |
| 3740 # endif | |
| 3741 ) | |
| 838 | 3742 { |
| 3743 /* Set it back to the current tab page. */ | |
| 3744 gui_mch_set_curtab(tabpage_index(curtab)); | |
| 3745 return FALSE; | |
| 3746 } | |
| 844 | 3747 |
| 691 | 3748 string[0] = CSI; |
| 3749 string[1] = KS_TABLINE; | |
| 3750 string[2] = KE_FILLER; | |
| 3751 add_to_input_buf(string, 3); | |
| 3752 string[0] = nr; | |
| 3753 add_to_input_buf_csi(string, 1); | |
| 3754 return TRUE; | |
| 3755 } | |
| 3756 | |
| 824 | 3757 /* |
| 3758 * Send a tabline menu event | |
| 3759 */ | |
| 3760 void | |
| 3761 send_tabline_menu_event(tabidx, event) | |
| 3762 int tabidx; | |
| 3763 int event; | |
| 3764 { | |
| 3765 char_u string[3]; | |
| 3766 | |
| 844 | 3767 /* Don't put events in the input queue now. */ |
| 3768 if (hold_gui_events) | |
| 3769 return; | |
| 3770 | |
| 824 | 3771 string[0] = CSI; |
| 3772 string[1] = KS_TABMENU; | |
| 3773 string[2] = KE_FILLER; | |
| 3774 add_to_input_buf(string, 3); | |
| 3775 string[0] = tabidx; | |
| 3776 string[1] = (char_u)(long)event; | |
| 3777 add_to_input_buf_csi(string, 2); | |
| 3778 } | |
| 3779 | |
| 685 | 3780 #endif |
| 7 | 3781 |
| 3782 /* | |
| 3783 * Scrollbar stuff: | |
| 3784 */ | |
| 3785 | |
| 669 | 3786 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO) |
| 3787 /* | |
| 3788 * Remove all scrollbars. Used before switching to another tab page. | |
| 3789 */ | |
| 3790 void | |
| 3791 gui_remove_scrollbars() | |
| 3792 { | |
| 3793 int i; | |
| 3794 win_T *wp; | |
| 3795 | |
| 3796 for (i = 0; i < 3; i++) | |
| 3797 { | |
| 3798 if (i == SBAR_BOTTOM) | |
| 3799 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(&gui.bottom_sbar, FALSE); | |
| 3800 else | |
| 3801 { | |
| 3802 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) | |
| 3803 { | |
| 3804 gui_do_scrollbar(wp, i, FALSE); | |
| 3805 } | |
| 3806 } | |
| 788 | 3807 curtab->tp_prev_which_scrollbars[i] = -1; |
| 669 | 3808 } |
| 3809 } | |
| 3810 #endif | |
| 3811 | |
| 7 | 3812 void |
| 3813 gui_create_scrollbar(sb, type, wp) | |
| 3814 scrollbar_T *sb; | |
| 3815 int type; | |
| 3816 win_T *wp; | |
| 3817 { | |
| 3818 static int sbar_ident = 0; | |
| 3819 | |
| 3820 sb->ident = sbar_ident++; /* No check for too big, but would it happen? */ | |
| 3821 sb->wp = wp; | |
| 3822 sb->type = type; | |
| 3823 sb->value = 0; | |
| 3824 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_ATHENA | |
| 3825 sb->pixval = 0; | |
| 3826 #endif | |
| 3827 sb->size = 1; | |
| 3828 sb->max = 1; | |
| 3829 sb->top = 0; | |
| 3830 sb->height = 0; | |
| 3831 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 3832 sb->width = 0; | |
| 3833 #endif | |
| 3834 sb->status_height = 0; | |
| 3835 gui_mch_create_scrollbar(sb, (wp == NULL) ? SBAR_HORIZ : SBAR_VERT); | |
| 3836 } | |
| 3837 | |
| 3838 /* | |
| 3839 * Find the scrollbar with the given index. | |
| 3840 */ | |
| 3841 scrollbar_T * | |
| 3842 gui_find_scrollbar(ident) | |
| 3843 long ident; | |
| 3844 { | |
| 3845 win_T *wp; | |
| 3846 | |
| 3847 if (gui.bottom_sbar.ident == ident) | |
| 3848 return &gui.bottom_sbar; | |
| 3849 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) | |
| 3850 { | |
| 3851 if (wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].ident == ident) | |
| 3852 return &wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]; | |
| 3853 if (wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].ident == ident) | |
| 3854 return &wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT]; | |
| 3855 } | |
| 3856 return NULL; | |
| 3857 } | |
| 3858 | |
| 3859 /* | |
| 3860 * For most systems: Put a code in the input buffer for a dragged scrollbar. | |
| 3861 * | |
| 3862 * For Win32, Macintosh and GTK+ 2: | |
| 3863 * Scrollbars seem to grab focus and vim doesn't read the input queue until | |
| 3864 * you stop dragging the scrollbar. We get here each time the scrollbar is | |
| 3865 * dragged another pixel, but as far as the rest of vim goes, it thinks | |
| 3866 * we're just hanging in the call to DispatchMessage() in | |
| 3867 * process_message(). The DispatchMessage() call that hangs was passed a | |
| 3868 * mouse button click event in the scrollbar window. -- webb. | |
| 3869 * | |
| 3870 * Solution: Do the scrolling right here. But only when allowed. | |
| 3871 * Ignore the scrollbars while executing an external command or when there | |
| 3872 * are still characters to be processed. | |
| 3873 */ | |
| 3874 void | |
| 3875 gui_drag_scrollbar(sb, value, still_dragging) | |
| 3876 scrollbar_T *sb; | |
| 3877 long value; | |
| 3878 int still_dragging; | |
| 3879 { | |
| 3880 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS | |
| 3881 win_T *wp; | |
| 3882 #endif | |
| 3883 int sb_num; | |
| 3884 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL | |
| 3885 colnr_T old_leftcol = curwin->w_leftcol; | |
| 3886 # ifdef FEAT_SCROLLBIND | |
| 3887 linenr_T old_topline = curwin->w_topline; | |
| 3888 # endif | |
| 3889 # ifdef FEAT_DIFF | |
| 3890 int old_topfill = curwin->w_topfill; | |
| 3891 # endif | |
| 3892 #else | |
| 664 | 3893 char_u bytes[sizeof(long_u)]; |
| 7 | 3894 int byte_count; |
| 3895 #endif | |
| 3896 | |
| 3897 if (sb == NULL) | |
| 3898 return; | |
| 3899 | |
| 3900 /* Don't put events in the input queue now. */ | |
| 3901 if (hold_gui_events) | |
| 3902 return; | |
| 3903 | |
| 3904 #ifdef FEAT_CMDWIN | |
| 3905 if (cmdwin_type != 0 && sb->wp != curwin) | |
| 3906 return; | |
| 3907 #endif | |
| 3908 | |
| 3909 if (still_dragging) | |
| 3910 { | |
| 3911 if (sb->wp == NULL) | |
| 3912 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_BOTTOM; | |
| 3913 else if (sb == &sb->wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]) | |
| 3914 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_LEFT; | |
| 3915 else | |
| 3916 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_RIGHT; | |
| 3917 gui.dragged_wp = sb->wp; | |
| 3918 } | |
| 3919 else | |
| 3920 { | |
| 3921 gui.dragged_sb = SBAR_NONE; | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
3922 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK |
| 7 | 3923 /* Keep the "dragged_wp" value until after the scrolling, for when the |
| 4352 | 3924 * mouse button is released. GTK2 doesn't send the button-up event. */ |
| 7 | 3925 gui.dragged_wp = NULL; |
| 3926 #endif | |
| 3927 } | |
| 3928 | |
| 3929 /* Vertical sbar info is kept in the first sbar (the left one) */ | |
| 3930 if (sb->wp != NULL) | |
| 3931 sb = &sb->wp->w_scrollbars[0]; | |
| 3932 | |
| 3933 /* | |
| 3934 * Check validity of value | |
| 3935 */ | |
| 3936 if (value < 0) | |
| 3937 value = 0; | |
| 3938 #ifdef SCROLL_PAST_END | |
| 3939 else if (value > sb->max) | |
| 3940 value = sb->max; | |
| 3941 #else | |
| 3942 if (value > sb->max - sb->size + 1) | |
| 3943 value = sb->max - sb->size + 1; | |
| 3944 #endif | |
| 3945 | |
| 3946 sb->value = value; | |
| 3947 | |
| 3948 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL | |
| 1476 | 3949 /* When not allowed to do the scrolling right now, return. |
| 3950 * This also checked input_available(), but that causes the first click in | |
| 3951 * a scrollbar to be ignored when Vim doesn't have focus. */ | |
| 3952 if (dont_scroll) | |
| 7 | 3953 return; |
| 3954 #endif | |
| 973 | 3955 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND |
| 3956 /* Disallow scrolling the current window when the completion popup menu is | |
| 3957 * visible. */ | |
| 3958 if ((sb->wp == NULL || sb->wp == curwin) && pum_visible()) | |
| 3959 return; | |
| 3960 #endif | |
| 7 | 3961 |
| 3962 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT | |
| 3963 if (sb->wp == NULL && curwin->w_p_rl) | |
| 3964 { | |
| 3965 value = sb->max + 1 - sb->size - value; | |
| 3966 if (value < 0) | |
| 3967 value = 0; | |
| 3968 } | |
| 3969 #endif | |
| 3970 | |
| 3971 if (sb->wp != NULL) /* vertical scrollbar */ | |
| 3972 { | |
| 3973 sb_num = 0; | |
| 3974 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS | |
| 3975 for (wp = firstwin; wp != sb->wp && wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) | |
| 3976 sb_num++; | |
| 3977 if (wp == NULL) | |
| 3978 return; | |
| 3979 #else | |
| 3980 if (sb->wp != curwin) | |
| 3981 return; | |
| 3982 #endif | |
| 3983 | |
| 3984 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL | |
| 3985 current_scrollbar = sb_num; | |
| 3986 scrollbar_value = value; | |
| 3987 if (State & NORMAL) | |
| 3988 { | |
| 3989 gui_do_scroll(); | |
| 3990 setcursor(); | |
| 3991 } | |
| 3992 else if (State & INSERT) | |
| 3993 { | |
| 3994 ins_scroll(); | |
| 3995 setcursor(); | |
| 3996 } | |
| 3997 else if (State & CMDLINE) | |
| 3998 { | |
| 3999 if (msg_scrolled == 0) | |
| 4000 { | |
| 4001 gui_do_scroll(); | |
| 4002 redrawcmdline(); | |
| 4003 } | |
| 4004 } | |
| 4005 # ifdef FEAT_FOLDING | |
| 4006 /* Value may have been changed for closed fold. */ | |
| 4007 sb->value = sb->wp->w_topline - 1; | |
| 4008 # endif | |
| 788 | 4009 |
| 4010 /* When dragging one scrollbar and there is another one at the other | |
| 4011 * side move the thumb of that one too. */ | |
| 4012 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT] && gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]) | |
| 4013 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_thumb( | |
| 4014 &sb->wp->w_scrollbars[ | |
| 4015 sb == &sb->wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT] | |
| 4016 ? SBAR_LEFT : SBAR_RIGHT], | |
| 4017 sb->value, sb->size, sb->max); | |
| 4018 | |
| 7 | 4019 #else |
| 4020 bytes[0] = CSI; | |
| 4021 bytes[1] = KS_VER_SCROLLBAR; | |
| 4022 bytes[2] = KE_FILLER; | |
| 4023 bytes[3] = (char_u)sb_num; | |
| 4024 byte_count = 4; | |
| 4025 #endif | |
| 4026 } | |
| 4027 else | |
| 4028 { | |
| 4029 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL | |
| 4030 scrollbar_value = value; | |
| 4031 | |
| 4032 if (State & NORMAL) | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4033 gui_do_horiz_scroll(scrollbar_value, FALSE); |
| 7 | 4034 else if (State & INSERT) |
| 4035 ins_horscroll(); | |
| 4036 else if (State & CMDLINE) | |
| 4037 { | |
| 540 | 4038 if (msg_scrolled == 0) |
| 7 | 4039 { |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4040 gui_do_horiz_scroll(scrollbar_value, FALSE); |
| 7 | 4041 redrawcmdline(); |
| 4042 } | |
| 4043 } | |
| 4044 if (old_leftcol != curwin->w_leftcol) | |
| 4045 { | |
| 4046 updateWindow(curwin); /* update window, status and cmdline */ | |
| 4047 setcursor(); | |
| 4048 } | |
| 4049 #else | |
| 4050 bytes[0] = CSI; | |
| 4051 bytes[1] = KS_HOR_SCROLLBAR; | |
| 4052 bytes[2] = KE_FILLER; | |
| 4053 byte_count = 3; | |
| 4054 #endif | |
| 4055 } | |
| 4056 | |
| 4057 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL | |
| 4058 # ifdef FEAT_SCROLLBIND | |
| 4059 /* | |
| 4060 * synchronize other windows, as necessary according to 'scrollbind' | |
| 4061 */ | |
| 4062 if (curwin->w_p_scb | |
| 4063 && ((sb->wp == NULL && curwin->w_leftcol != old_leftcol) | |
| 4064 || (sb->wp == curwin && (curwin->w_topline != old_topline | |
| 4065 # ifdef FEAT_DIFF | |
| 4066 || curwin->w_topfill != old_topfill | |
| 4067 # endif | |
| 4068 )))) | |
| 4069 { | |
| 4070 do_check_scrollbind(TRUE); | |
| 4071 /* need to update the window right here */ | |
| 4072 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) | |
| 4073 if (wp->w_redr_type > 0) | |
| 4074 updateWindow(wp); | |
| 4075 setcursor(); | |
| 4076 } | |
| 4077 # endif | |
| 4078 out_flush(); | |
| 4079 gui_update_cursor(FALSE, TRUE); | |
| 4080 #else | |
| 664 | 4081 add_to_input_buf(bytes, byte_count); |
| 4082 add_long_to_buf((long_u)value, bytes); | |
| 4083 add_to_input_buf_csi(bytes, sizeof(long_u)); | |
| 7 | 4084 #endif |
| 4085 } | |
| 4086 | |
| 4087 /* | |
| 4088 * Scrollbar stuff: | |
| 4089 */ | |
| 4090 | |
|
2237
770485470e59
Add a few #ifdefs to exclude functions that are not used. (Domnique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2210
diff
changeset
|
4091 #if defined(FEAT_AUTOCMD) || defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO) |
| 1906 | 4092 /* |
| 4093 * Called when something in the window layout has changed. | |
| 4094 */ | |
| 4095 void | |
| 4096 gui_may_update_scrollbars() | |
| 4097 { | |
| 4098 if (gui.in_use && starting == 0) | |
| 4099 { | |
| 4100 out_flush(); | |
| 4101 gui_init_which_components(NULL); | |
| 4102 gui_update_scrollbars(TRUE); | |
| 4103 } | |
| 4104 need_mouse_correct = TRUE; | |
| 4105 } | |
|
2237
770485470e59
Add a few #ifdefs to exclude functions that are not used. (Domnique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2210
diff
changeset
|
4106 #endif |
| 1906 | 4107 |
| 7 | 4108 void |
| 4109 gui_update_scrollbars(force) | |
| 4110 int force; /* Force all scrollbars to get updated */ | |
| 4111 { | |
| 4112 win_T *wp; | |
| 4113 scrollbar_T *sb; | |
| 4114 long val, size, max; /* need 32 bits here */ | |
| 4115 int which_sb; | |
| 4116 int h, y; | |
| 4117 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 4118 static win_T *prev_curwin = NULL; | |
| 4119 #endif | |
| 4120 | |
| 4121 /* Update the horizontal scrollbar */ | |
| 4122 gui_update_horiz_scrollbar(force); | |
| 4123 | |
| 4124 #ifndef WIN3264 | |
| 4125 /* Return straight away if there is neither a left nor right scrollbar. | |
| 4126 * On MS-Windows this is required anyway for scrollwheel messages. */ | |
| 4127 if (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] && !gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT]) | |
| 4128 return; | |
| 4129 #endif | |
| 4130 | |
| 4131 /* | |
| 4132 * Don't want to update a scrollbar while we're dragging it. But if we | |
| 4133 * have both a left and right scrollbar, and we drag one of them, we still | |
| 4134 * need to update the other one. | |
| 4135 */ | |
| 674 | 4136 if (!force && (gui.dragged_sb == SBAR_LEFT || gui.dragged_sb == SBAR_RIGHT) |
| 4137 && gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] | |
| 4138 && gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT]) | |
| 7 | 4139 { |
| 4140 /* | |
| 4141 * If we have two scrollbars and one of them is being dragged, just | |
| 4142 * copy the scrollbar position from the dragged one to the other one. | |
| 4143 */ | |
| 4144 which_sb = SBAR_LEFT + SBAR_RIGHT - gui.dragged_sb; | |
| 4145 if (gui.dragged_wp != NULL) | |
| 4146 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_thumb( | |
| 4147 &gui.dragged_wp->w_scrollbars[which_sb], | |
| 4148 gui.dragged_wp->w_scrollbars[0].value, | |
| 4149 gui.dragged_wp->w_scrollbars[0].size, | |
| 4150 gui.dragged_wp->w_scrollbars[0].max); | |
| 4151 } | |
| 4152 | |
| 4153 /* avoid that moving components around generates events */ | |
| 4154 ++hold_gui_events; | |
| 4155 | |
| 4156 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = W_NEXT(wp)) | |
| 4157 { | |
| 4158 if (wp->w_buffer == NULL) /* just in case */ | |
| 4159 continue; | |
| 674 | 4160 /* Skip a scrollbar that is being dragged. */ |
| 4161 if (!force && (gui.dragged_sb == SBAR_LEFT | |
| 4162 || gui.dragged_sb == SBAR_RIGHT) | |
| 4163 && gui.dragged_wp == wp) | |
| 4164 continue; | |
| 4165 | |
| 7 | 4166 #ifdef SCROLL_PAST_END |
| 4167 max = wp->w_buffer->b_ml.ml_line_count - 1; | |
| 4168 #else | |
| 4169 max = wp->w_buffer->b_ml.ml_line_count + wp->w_height - 2; | |
| 4170 #endif | |
| 4171 if (max < 0) /* empty buffer */ | |
| 4172 max = 0; | |
| 4173 val = wp->w_topline - 1; | |
| 4174 size = wp->w_height; | |
| 4175 #ifdef SCROLL_PAST_END | |
| 4176 if (val > max) /* just in case */ | |
| 4177 val = max; | |
| 4178 #else | |
| 4179 if (size > max + 1) /* just in case */ | |
| 4180 size = max + 1; | |
| 4181 if (val > max - size + 1) | |
| 4182 val = max - size + 1; | |
| 4183 #endif | |
| 4184 if (val < 0) /* minimal value is 0 */ | |
| 4185 val = 0; | |
| 4186 | |
| 4187 /* | |
| 4188 * Scrollbar at index 0 (the left one) contains all the information. | |
| 4189 * It would be the same info for left and right so we just store it for | |
| 4190 * one of them. | |
| 4191 */ | |
| 4192 sb = &wp->w_scrollbars[0]; | |
| 4193 | |
| 4194 /* | |
| 4195 * Note: no check for valid w_botline. If it's not valid the | |
| 4196 * scrollbars will be updated later anyway. | |
| 4197 */ | |
| 4198 if (size < 1 || wp->w_botline - 2 > max) | |
| 4199 { | |
| 4200 /* | |
| 4201 * This can happen during changing files. Just don't update the | |
| 4202 * scrollbar for now. | |
| 4203 */ | |
| 4204 sb->height = 0; /* Force update next time */ | |
| 4205 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]) | |
| 4206 gui_do_scrollbar(wp, SBAR_LEFT, FALSE); | |
| 4207 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT]) | |
| 4208 gui_do_scrollbar(wp, SBAR_RIGHT, FALSE); | |
| 4209 continue; | |
| 4210 } | |
| 4211 if (force || sb->height != wp->w_height | |
| 4212 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS | |
| 4213 || sb->top != wp->w_winrow | |
| 4214 || sb->status_height != wp->w_status_height | |
| 4215 # ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 4216 || sb->width != wp->w_width | |
| 4217 || prev_curwin != curwin | |
| 4218 # endif | |
| 4219 #endif | |
| 4220 ) | |
| 4221 { | |
| 4222 /* Height, width or position of scrollbar has changed. For | |
| 4223 * vertical split: curwin changed. */ | |
| 4224 sb->height = wp->w_height; | |
| 4225 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS | |
| 4226 sb->top = wp->w_winrow; | |
| 4227 sb->status_height = wp->w_status_height; | |
| 4228 # ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 4229 sb->width = wp->w_width; | |
| 4230 # endif | |
| 4231 #endif | |
| 4232 | |
| 4233 /* Calculate height and position in pixels */ | |
| 4234 h = (sb->height + sb->status_height) * gui.char_height; | |
| 4235 y = sb->top * gui.char_height + gui.border_offset; | |
| 4236 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_MOTIF) && !defined(FEAT_GUI_PHOTON) | |
| 4237 if (gui.menu_is_active) | |
| 4238 y += gui.menu_height; | |
| 4239 #endif | |
| 4240 | |
| 4241 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) && (defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) || defined(FEAT_GUI_ATHENA)) | |
| 4242 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL) | |
| 4243 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_ATHENA | |
| 4244 y += gui.toolbar_height; | |
| 4245 # else | |
| 4246 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_MSWIN | |
| 4247 y += TOOLBAR_BUTTON_HEIGHT + TOOLBAR_BORDER_HEIGHT; | |
| 4248 # endif | |
| 4249 # endif | |
| 4250 #endif | |
| 4251 | |
| 810 | 4252 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) && defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) |
| 4253 if (gui_has_tabline()) | |
| 843 | 4254 y += gui.tabline_height; |
| 810 | 4255 #endif |
| 4256 | |
| 7 | 4257 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 4258 if (wp->w_winrow == 0) | |
| 4259 #endif | |
| 4260 { | |
| 4261 /* Height of top scrollbar includes width of top border */ | |
| 4262 h += gui.border_offset; | |
| 4263 y -= gui.border_offset; | |
| 4264 } | |
| 4265 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]) | |
| 4266 { | |
| 4267 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_pos(&wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT], | |
| 4268 gui.left_sbar_x, y, | |
| 4269 gui.scrollbar_width, h); | |
| 4270 gui_do_scrollbar(wp, SBAR_LEFT, TRUE); | |
| 4271 } | |
| 4272 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT]) | |
| 4273 { | |
| 4274 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_pos(&wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT], | |
| 4275 gui.right_sbar_x, y, | |
| 4276 gui.scrollbar_width, h); | |
| 4277 gui_do_scrollbar(wp, SBAR_RIGHT, TRUE); | |
| 4278 } | |
| 4279 } | |
| 4280 | |
| 4281 /* Reduce the number of calls to gui_mch_set_scrollbar_thumb() by | |
| 4282 * checking if the thumb moved at least a pixel. Only do this for | |
| 4283 * Athena, most other GUIs require the update anyway to make the | |
| 4284 * arrows work. */ | |
| 4285 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_ATHENA | |
| 4286 if (max == 0) | |
| 4287 y = 0; | |
| 4288 else | |
| 4289 y = (val * (sb->height + 2) * gui.char_height + max / 2) / max; | |
| 4290 if (force || sb->pixval != y || sb->size != size || sb->max != max) | |
| 4291 #else | |
| 4292 if (force || sb->value != val || sb->size != size || sb->max != max) | |
| 4293 #endif | |
| 4294 { | |
| 4295 /* Thumb of scrollbar has moved */ | |
| 4296 sb->value = val; | |
| 4297 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_ATHENA | |
| 4298 sb->pixval = y; | |
| 4299 #endif | |
| 4300 sb->size = size; | |
| 4301 sb->max = max; | |
| 674 | 4302 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] |
| 4303 && (gui.dragged_sb != SBAR_LEFT || gui.dragged_wp != wp)) | |
| 7 | 4304 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_thumb(&wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT], |
| 4305 val, size, max); | |
| 4306 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT] | |
| 674 | 4307 && (gui.dragged_sb != SBAR_RIGHT || gui.dragged_wp != wp)) |
| 7 | 4308 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_thumb(&wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT], |
| 4309 val, size, max); | |
| 4310 } | |
| 4311 } | |
| 4312 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 4313 prev_curwin = curwin; | |
| 4314 #endif | |
| 4315 --hold_gui_events; | |
| 4316 } | |
| 4317 | |
| 4318 /* | |
| 4319 * Enable or disable a scrollbar. | |
| 4320 * Check for scrollbars for vertically split windows which are not enabled | |
| 4321 * sometimes. | |
| 4322 */ | |
| 4323 static void | |
| 4324 gui_do_scrollbar(wp, which, enable) | |
| 4325 win_T *wp; | |
| 4326 int which; /* SBAR_LEFT or SBAR_RIGHT */ | |
| 4327 int enable; /* TRUE to enable scrollbar */ | |
| 4328 { | |
| 4329 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 4330 int midcol = curwin->w_wincol + curwin->w_width / 2; | |
| 4331 int has_midcol = (wp->w_wincol <= midcol | |
| 4332 && wp->w_wincol + wp->w_width >= midcol); | |
| 4333 | |
| 4334 /* Only enable scrollbars that contain the middle column of the current | |
| 4335 * window. */ | |
| 4336 if (gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT] != gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]) | |
| 4337 { | |
| 4338 /* Scrollbars only on one side. Don't enable scrollbars that don't | |
| 4339 * contain the middle column of the current window. */ | |
| 4340 if (!has_midcol) | |
| 4341 enable = FALSE; | |
| 4342 } | |
| 4343 else | |
| 4344 { | |
| 4345 /* Scrollbars on both sides. Don't enable scrollbars that neither | |
| 4346 * contain the middle column of the current window nor are on the far | |
| 4347 * side. */ | |
| 4348 if (midcol > Columns / 2) | |
| 4349 { | |
| 4350 if (which == SBAR_LEFT ? wp->w_wincol != 0 : !has_midcol) | |
| 4351 enable = FALSE; | |
| 4352 } | |
| 4353 else | |
| 4354 { | |
| 4355 if (which == SBAR_RIGHT ? wp->w_wincol + wp->w_width != Columns | |
| 4356 : !has_midcol) | |
| 4357 enable = FALSE; | |
| 4358 } | |
| 4359 } | |
| 4360 #endif | |
| 4361 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(&wp->w_scrollbars[which], enable); | |
| 4362 } | |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 /* | |
| 4365 * Scroll a window according to the values set in the globals current_scrollbar | |
| 4366 * and scrollbar_value. Return TRUE if the cursor in the current window moved | |
| 4367 * or FALSE otherwise. | |
| 4368 */ | |
| 4369 int | |
| 4370 gui_do_scroll() | |
| 4371 { | |
| 4372 win_T *wp, *save_wp; | |
| 4373 int i; | |
| 4374 long nlines; | |
| 4375 pos_T old_cursor; | |
| 4376 linenr_T old_topline; | |
| 4377 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF | |
| 4378 int old_topfill; | |
| 4379 #endif | |
| 4380 | |
| 4381 for (wp = firstwin, i = 0; i < current_scrollbar; wp = W_NEXT(wp), i++) | |
| 4382 if (wp == NULL) | |
| 4383 break; | |
| 4384 if (wp == NULL) | |
| 4385 /* Couldn't find window */ | |
| 4386 return FALSE; | |
| 4387 | |
| 4388 /* | |
| 4389 * Compute number of lines to scroll. If zero, nothing to do. | |
| 4390 */ | |
| 4391 nlines = (long)scrollbar_value + 1 - (long)wp->w_topline; | |
| 4392 if (nlines == 0) | |
| 4393 return FALSE; | |
| 4394 | |
| 4395 save_wp = curwin; | |
| 4396 old_topline = wp->w_topline; | |
| 4397 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF | |
| 4398 old_topfill = wp->w_topfill; | |
| 4399 #endif | |
| 4400 old_cursor = wp->w_cursor; | |
| 4401 curwin = wp; | |
| 4402 curbuf = wp->w_buffer; | |
| 4403 if (nlines < 0) | |
| 4404 scrolldown(-nlines, gui.dragged_wp == NULL); | |
| 4405 else | |
| 4406 scrollup(nlines, gui.dragged_wp == NULL); | |
| 4407 /* Reset dragged_wp after using it. "dragged_sb" will have been reset for | |
| 4408 * the mouse-up event already, but we still want it to behave like when | |
| 4409 * dragging. But not the next click in an arrow. */ | |
| 4410 if (gui.dragged_sb == SBAR_NONE) | |
| 4411 gui.dragged_wp = NULL; | |
| 4412 | |
| 4413 if (old_topline != wp->w_topline | |
| 4414 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF | |
| 4415 || old_topfill != wp->w_topfill | |
| 4416 #endif | |
| 4417 ) | |
| 4418 { | |
| 4419 if (p_so != 0) | |
| 4420 { | |
| 4421 cursor_correct(); /* fix window for 'so' */ | |
| 4422 update_topline(); /* avoid up/down jump */ | |
| 4423 } | |
| 4424 if (old_cursor.lnum != wp->w_cursor.lnum) | |
| 4425 coladvance(wp->w_curswant); | |
| 4426 #ifdef FEAT_SCROLLBIND | |
| 4427 wp->w_scbind_pos = wp->w_topline; | |
| 4428 #endif | |
| 4429 } | |
| 4430 | |
| 519 | 4431 /* Make sure wp->w_leftcol and wp->w_skipcol are correct. */ |
| 4432 validate_cursor(); | |
| 4433 | |
| 7 | 4434 curwin = save_wp; |
| 4435 curbuf = save_wp->w_buffer; | |
| 4436 | |
| 4437 /* | |
| 4438 * Don't call updateWindow() when nothing has changed (it will overwrite | |
| 4439 * the status line!). | |
| 4440 */ | |
| 4441 if (old_topline != wp->w_topline | |
| 519 | 4442 || wp->w_redr_type != 0 |
| 7 | 4443 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF |
| 4444 || old_topfill != wp->w_topfill | |
| 4445 #endif | |
| 4446 ) | |
| 4447 { | |
| 1434 | 4448 int type = VALID; |
| 4449 | |
| 4450 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND | |
| 4451 if (pum_visible()) | |
| 4452 { | |
| 4453 type = NOT_VALID; | |
| 4454 wp->w_lines_valid = 0; | |
| 4455 } | |
| 4456 #endif | |
| 4457 /* Don't set must_redraw here, it may cause the popup menu to | |
| 4458 * disappear when losing focus after a scrollbar drag. */ | |
| 4459 if (wp->w_redr_type < type) | |
| 4460 wp->w_redr_type = type; | |
| 7 | 4461 updateWindow(wp); /* update window, status line, and cmdline */ |
| 4462 } | |
| 4463 | |
| 973 | 4464 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND |
| 4465 /* May need to redraw the popup menu. */ | |
| 4466 if (pum_visible()) | |
| 4467 pum_redraw(); | |
| 4468 #endif | |
| 4469 | |
| 7 | 4470 return (wp == curwin && !equalpos(curwin->w_cursor, old_cursor)); |
| 4471 } | |
| 4472 | |
| 4473 | |
| 4474 /* | |
| 4475 * Horizontal scrollbar stuff: | |
| 4476 */ | |
| 4477 | |
| 4478 /* | |
| 4479 * Return length of line "lnum" for horizontal scrolling. | |
| 4480 */ | |
| 4481 static colnr_T | |
| 4482 scroll_line_len(lnum) | |
| 4483 linenr_T lnum; | |
| 4484 { | |
| 4485 char_u *p; | |
| 4486 colnr_T col; | |
| 4487 int w; | |
| 4488 | |
| 4489 p = ml_get(lnum); | |
| 4490 col = 0; | |
| 4491 if (*p != NUL) | |
| 4492 for (;;) | |
| 4493 { | |
| 4494 w = chartabsize(p, col); | |
| 39 | 4495 mb_ptr_adv(p); |
| 7 | 4496 if (*p == NUL) /* don't count the last character */ |
| 4497 break; | |
| 4498 col += w; | |
| 4499 } | |
| 4500 return col; | |
| 4501 } | |
| 4502 | |
| 4503 /* Remember which line is currently the longest, so that we don't have to | |
| 4504 * search for it when scrolling horizontally. */ | |
| 4505 static linenr_T longest_lnum = 0; | |
| 4506 | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4507 /* |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4508 * Find longest visible line number. If this is not possible (or not desired, |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4509 * by setting 'h' in "guioptions") then the current line number is returned. |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4510 */ |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4511 static linenr_T |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4512 gui_find_longest_lnum() |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4513 { |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4514 linenr_T ret = 0; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4515 |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4516 /* Calculate maximum for horizontal scrollbar. Check for reasonable |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4517 * line numbers, topline and botline can be invalid when displaying is |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4518 * postponed. */ |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4519 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_HORSCROLL) == NULL |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4520 && curwin->w_topline <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4521 && curwin->w_botline > curwin->w_cursor.lnum |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4522 && curwin->w_botline <= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count + 1) |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4523 { |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4524 linenr_T lnum; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4525 colnr_T n; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4526 long max = 0; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4527 |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4528 /* Use maximum of all visible lines. Remember the lnum of the |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4529 * longest line, closest to the cursor line. Used when scrolling |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4530 * below. */ |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4531 for (lnum = curwin->w_topline; lnum < curwin->w_botline; ++lnum) |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4532 { |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4533 n = scroll_line_len(lnum); |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4534 if (n > (colnr_T)max) |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4535 { |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4536 max = n; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4537 ret = lnum; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4538 } |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4539 else if (n == (colnr_T)max |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4540 && abs((int)(lnum - curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4541 < abs((int)(ret - curwin->w_cursor.lnum))) |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4542 ret = lnum; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4543 } |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4544 } |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4545 else |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4546 /* Use cursor line only. */ |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4547 ret = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4548 |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4549 return ret; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4550 } |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4551 |
| 7 | 4552 static void |
| 4553 gui_update_horiz_scrollbar(force) | |
| 4554 int force; | |
| 4555 { | |
| 4556 long value, size, max; /* need 32 bit ints here */ | |
| 4557 | |
| 4558 if (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_BOTTOM]) | |
| 4559 return; | |
| 4560 | |
| 4561 if (!force && gui.dragged_sb == SBAR_BOTTOM) | |
| 4562 return; | |
| 4563 | |
| 4564 if (!force && curwin->w_p_wrap && gui.prev_wrap) | |
| 4565 return; | |
| 4566 | |
| 4567 /* | |
| 4568 * It is possible for the cursor to be invalid if we're in the middle of | |
| 4569 * something (like changing files). If so, don't do anything for now. | |
| 4570 */ | |
| 4571 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) | |
| 4572 { | |
| 4573 gui.bottom_sbar.value = -1; | |
| 4574 return; | |
| 4575 } | |
| 4576 | |
| 4577 size = W_WIDTH(curwin); | |
| 4578 if (curwin->w_p_wrap) | |
| 4579 { | |
| 4580 value = 0; | |
| 4581 #ifdef SCROLL_PAST_END | |
| 4582 max = 0; | |
| 4583 #else | |
| 4584 max = W_WIDTH(curwin) - 1; | |
| 4585 #endif | |
| 4586 } | |
| 4587 else | |
| 4588 { | |
| 4589 value = curwin->w_leftcol; | |
| 4590 | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4591 longest_lnum = gui_find_longest_lnum(); |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4592 max = scroll_line_len(longest_lnum); |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4593 |
| 7 | 4594 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT |
| 4595 if (virtual_active()) | |
| 4596 { | |
| 4597 /* May move the cursor even further to the right. */ | |
| 4598 if (curwin->w_virtcol >= (colnr_T)max) | |
| 4599 max = curwin->w_virtcol; | |
| 4600 } | |
| 4601 #endif | |
| 4602 | |
| 4603 #ifndef SCROLL_PAST_END | |
| 4604 max += W_WIDTH(curwin) - 1; | |
| 4605 #endif | |
| 4606 /* The line number isn't scrolled, thus there is less space when | |
|
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2065
diff
changeset
|
4607 * 'number' or 'relativenumber' is set (also for 'foldcolumn'). */ |
| 7 | 4608 size -= curwin_col_off(); |
| 4609 #ifndef SCROLL_PAST_END | |
| 4610 max -= curwin_col_off(); | |
| 4611 #endif | |
| 4612 } | |
| 4613 | |
| 4614 #ifndef SCROLL_PAST_END | |
| 4615 if (value > max - size + 1) | |
| 4616 value = max - size + 1; /* limit the value to allowable range */ | |
| 4617 #endif | |
| 4618 | |
| 4619 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT | |
| 4620 if (curwin->w_p_rl) | |
| 4621 { | |
| 4622 value = max + 1 - size - value; | |
| 4623 if (value < 0) | |
| 4624 { | |
| 4625 size += value; | |
| 4626 value = 0; | |
| 4627 } | |
| 4628 } | |
| 4629 #endif | |
| 4630 if (!force && value == gui.bottom_sbar.value && size == gui.bottom_sbar.size | |
| 4631 && max == gui.bottom_sbar.max) | |
| 4632 return; | |
| 4633 | |
| 4634 gui.bottom_sbar.value = value; | |
| 4635 gui.bottom_sbar.size = size; | |
| 4636 gui.bottom_sbar.max = max; | |
| 4637 gui.prev_wrap = curwin->w_p_wrap; | |
| 4638 | |
| 4639 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_thumb(&gui.bottom_sbar, value, size, max); | |
| 4640 } | |
| 4641 | |
| 4642 /* | |
| 4643 * Do a horizontal scroll. Return TRUE if the cursor moved, FALSE otherwise. | |
| 4644 */ | |
| 4645 int | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4646 gui_do_horiz_scroll(leftcol, compute_longest_lnum) |
|
2416
1a9c16dd76d4
Fix compiler warnings on 64 bit systems.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4647 long_u leftcol; |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4648 int compute_longest_lnum; |
| 7 | 4649 { |
| 4650 /* no wrapping, no scrolling */ | |
| 4651 if (curwin->w_p_wrap) | |
| 4652 return FALSE; | |
| 4653 | |
|
2416
1a9c16dd76d4
Fix compiler warnings on 64 bit systems.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4654 if (curwin->w_leftcol == (colnr_T)leftcol) |
| 7 | 4655 return FALSE; |
| 4656 | |
|
2416
1a9c16dd76d4
Fix compiler warnings on 64 bit systems.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4657 curwin->w_leftcol = (colnr_T)leftcol; |
| 7 | 4658 |
| 4659 /* When the line of the cursor is too short, move the cursor to the | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4660 * longest visible line. */ |
| 7 | 4661 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_HORSCROLL) == NULL |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4662 && !virtual_active() |
|
2416
1a9c16dd76d4
Fix compiler warnings on 64 bit systems.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4663 && (colnr_T)leftcol > scroll_line_len(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) |
| 7 | 4664 { |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4665 if (compute_longest_lnum) |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4666 { |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4667 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = gui_find_longest_lnum(); |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4668 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4669 } |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4670 /* Do a sanity check on "longest_lnum", just in case. */ |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4671 else if (longest_lnum >= curwin->w_topline |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
4672 && longest_lnum < curwin->w_botline) |
| 7 | 4673 { |
| 4674 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = longest_lnum; | |
| 4675 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; | |
| 4676 } | |
| 4677 } | |
| 4678 | |
| 4679 return leftcol_changed(); | |
| 4680 } | |
| 4681 | |
| 4682 /* | |
| 4683 * Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color | |
| 4684 */ | |
| 4685 void | |
| 4686 gui_check_colors() | |
| 4687 { | |
| 4688 if (gui.norm_pixel == gui.back_pixel || gui.norm_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 4689 { | |
| 4690 gui_set_bg_color((char_u *)"White"); | |
| 4691 if (gui.norm_pixel == gui.back_pixel || gui.norm_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 4692 gui_set_fg_color((char_u *)"Black"); | |
| 4693 } | |
| 4694 } | |
| 4695 | |
| 203 | 4696 static void |
| 7 | 4697 gui_set_fg_color(name) |
| 4698 char_u *name; | |
| 4699 { | |
| 4700 gui.norm_pixel = gui_get_color(name); | |
| 4701 hl_set_fg_color_name(vim_strsave(name)); | |
| 4702 } | |
| 4703 | |
| 203 | 4704 static void |
| 7 | 4705 gui_set_bg_color(name) |
| 4706 char_u *name; | |
| 4707 { | |
| 4708 gui.back_pixel = gui_get_color(name); | |
| 4709 hl_set_bg_color_name(vim_strsave(name)); | |
| 4710 } | |
| 4711 | |
| 4712 /* | |
| 4713 * Allocate a color by name. | |
| 4714 * Returns INVALCOLOR and gives an error message when failed. | |
| 4715 */ | |
| 4716 guicolor_T | |
| 4717 gui_get_color(name) | |
| 4718 char_u *name; | |
| 4719 { | |
| 4720 guicolor_T t; | |
| 4721 | |
| 4722 if (*name == NUL) | |
| 4723 return INVALCOLOR; | |
| 4724 t = gui_mch_get_color(name); | |
| 11 | 4725 |
| 7 | 4726 if (t == INVALCOLOR |
| 574 | 4727 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) || defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) |
| 7 | 4728 && gui.in_use |
| 4729 #endif | |
| 4730 ) | |
| 4731 EMSG2(_("E254: Cannot allocate color %s"), name); | |
| 4732 return t; | |
| 4733 } | |
| 4734 | |
| 4735 /* | |
| 4736 * Return the grey value of a color (range 0-255). | |
| 4737 */ | |
| 4738 int | |
| 4739 gui_get_lightness(pixel) | |
| 4740 guicolor_T pixel; | |
| 4741 { | |
| 4742 long_u rgb = gui_mch_get_rgb(pixel); | |
| 4743 | |
| 835 | 4744 return (int)( (((rgb >> 16) & 0xff) * 299) |
| 856 | 4745 + (((rgb >> 8) & 0xff) * 587) |
| 4746 + ((rgb & 0xff) * 114)) / 1000; | |
| 7 | 4747 } |
| 4748 | |
| 4749 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 4750 void | |
| 4751 gui_new_scrollbar_colors() | |
| 4752 { | |
| 4753 win_T *wp; | |
| 4754 | |
| 4755 /* Nothing to do if GUI hasn't started yet. */ | |
| 4756 if (!gui.in_use) | |
| 4757 return; | |
| 4758 | |
| 4759 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) | |
| 4760 { | |
| 4761 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_colors(&(wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT])); | |
| 4762 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_colors(&(wp->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT])); | |
| 4763 } | |
| 4764 gui_mch_set_scrollbar_colors(&gui.bottom_sbar); | |
| 4765 } | |
| 4766 #endif | |
| 4767 | |
| 4768 /* | |
| 4769 * Call this when focus has changed. | |
| 4770 */ | |
| 4771 void | |
| 4772 gui_focus_change(in_focus) | |
| 4773 int in_focus; | |
| 4774 { | |
| 4775 /* | |
| 4776 * Skip this code to avoid drawing the cursor when debugging and switching | |
| 4777 * between the debugger window and gvim. | |
| 4778 */ | |
| 4779 #if 1 | |
| 4780 gui.in_focus = in_focus; | |
| 4781 out_flush(); /* make sure output has been written */ | |
| 4782 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 4783 | |
| 4784 # ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 4785 xim_set_focus(in_focus); | |
| 4786 # endif | |
| 4787 | |
| 1380 | 4788 /* Put events in the input queue only when allowed. |
| 4789 * ui_focus_change() isn't called directly, because it invokes | |
| 4790 * autocommands and that must not happen asynchronously. */ | |
| 4791 if (!hold_gui_events) | |
| 4792 { | |
| 4793 char_u bytes[3]; | |
| 4794 | |
| 4795 bytes[0] = CSI; | |
| 4796 bytes[1] = KS_EXTRA; | |
| 4797 bytes[2] = in_focus ? (int)KE_FOCUSGAINED : (int)KE_FOCUSLOST; | |
| 4798 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3); | |
| 4799 } | |
| 7 | 4800 #endif |
| 4801 } | |
| 4802 | |
| 4803 /* | |
| 4804 * Called when the mouse moved (but not when dragging). | |
| 4805 */ | |
| 4806 void | |
| 4807 gui_mouse_moved(x, y) | |
| 4808 int x; | |
| 4809 int y; | |
| 4810 { | |
| 4811 win_T *wp; | |
| 894 | 4812 char_u st[8]; |
| 7 | 4813 |
| 771 | 4814 /* Ignore this while still starting up. */ |
| 4815 if (!gui.in_use || gui.starting) | |
| 4816 return; | |
| 4817 | |
| 7 | 4818 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE |
| 4819 /* Get window pointer, and update mouse shape as well. */ | |
| 4820 wp = xy2win(x, y); | |
| 4821 #endif | |
| 4822 | |
| 4823 /* Only handle this when 'mousefocus' set and ... */ | |
| 4824 if (p_mousef | |
| 4825 && !hold_gui_events /* not holding events */ | |
| 4826 && (State & (NORMAL|INSERT))/* Normal/Visual/Insert mode */ | |
| 4827 && State != HITRETURN /* but not hit-return prompt */ | |
| 4828 && msg_scrolled == 0 /* no scrolled message */ | |
| 4829 && !need_mouse_correct /* not moving the pointer */ | |
| 4830 && gui.in_focus) /* gvim in focus */ | |
| 4831 { | |
| 4832 /* Don't move the mouse when it's left or right of the Vim window */ | |
| 4833 if (x < 0 || x > Columns * gui.char_width) | |
| 4834 return; | |
| 4835 #ifndef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
| 4836 wp = xy2win(x, y); | |
| 4837 #endif | |
| 4838 if (wp == curwin || wp == NULL) | |
| 4839 return; /* still in the same old window, or none at all */ | |
| 4840 | |
| 859 | 4841 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 4842 /* Ignore position in the tab pages line. */ | |
| 4843 if (Y_2_ROW(y) < tabline_height()) | |
| 4844 return; | |
| 4845 #endif | |
| 4846 | |
| 7 | 4847 /* |
| 4848 * format a mouse click on status line input | |
| 4849 * ala gui_send_mouse_event(0, x, y, 0, 0); | |
| 261 | 4850 * Trick: Use a column number -1, so that get_pseudo_mouse_code() will |
| 4851 * generate a K_LEFTMOUSE_NM key code. | |
| 7 | 4852 */ |
| 4853 if (finish_op) | |
| 4854 { | |
| 4855 /* abort the current operator first */ | |
| 4856 st[0] = ESC; | |
| 4857 add_to_input_buf(st, 1); | |
| 4858 } | |
| 4859 st[0] = CSI; | |
| 4860 st[1] = KS_MOUSE; | |
| 4861 st[2] = KE_FILLER; | |
| 4862 st[3] = (char_u)MOUSE_LEFT; | |
| 4863 fill_mouse_coord(st + 4, | |
| 4864 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 261 | 4865 wp->w_wincol == 0 ? -1 : wp->w_wincol + MOUSE_COLOFF, |
| 7 | 4866 #else |
| 4867 -1, | |
| 4868 #endif | |
| 4869 wp->w_height + W_WINROW(wp)); | |
| 4870 | |
| 4871 add_to_input_buf(st, 8); | |
| 4872 st[3] = (char_u)MOUSE_RELEASE; | |
| 4873 add_to_input_buf(st, 8); | |
| 4874 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GTK | |
| 4875 /* Need to wake up the main loop */ | |
| 4876 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
| 4877 gtk_main_quit(); | |
| 4878 #endif | |
| 4879 } | |
| 4880 } | |
| 4881 | |
| 4882 /* | |
| 4883 * Called when mouse should be moved to window with focus. | |
| 4884 */ | |
| 4885 void | |
| 4886 gui_mouse_correct() | |
| 4887 { | |
| 4888 int x, y; | |
| 4889 win_T *wp = NULL; | |
| 4890 | |
| 4891 need_mouse_correct = FALSE; | |
| 87 | 4892 |
| 4893 if (!(gui.in_use && p_mousef)) | |
| 4894 return; | |
| 4895 | |
| 4896 gui_mch_getmouse(&x, &y); | |
| 4897 /* Don't move the mouse when it's left or right of the Vim window */ | |
| 4898 if (x < 0 || x > Columns * gui.char_width) | |
| 4899 return; | |
| 877 | 4900 if (y >= 0 |
| 859 | 4901 # ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS |
| 877 | 4902 && Y_2_ROW(y) >= tabline_height() |
| 859 | 4903 # endif |
| 877 | 4904 ) |
| 87 | 4905 wp = xy2win(x, y); |
| 4906 if (wp != curwin && wp != NULL) /* If in other than current window */ | |
| 7 | 4907 { |
| 87 | 4908 validate_cline_row(); |
| 4909 gui_mch_setmouse((int)W_ENDCOL(curwin) * gui.char_width - 3, | |
| 4910 (W_WINROW(curwin) + curwin->w_wrow) * gui.char_height | |
| 7 | 4911 + (gui.char_height) / 2); |
| 4912 } | |
| 4913 } | |
| 4914 | |
| 4915 /* | |
| 4916 * Find window where the mouse pointer "y" coordinate is in. | |
| 4917 */ | |
| 4918 static win_T * | |
| 4919 xy2win(x, y) | |
| 1887 | 4920 int x UNUSED; |
| 4921 int y UNUSED; | |
| 7 | 4922 { |
| 4923 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS | |
| 4924 int row; | |
| 4925 int col; | |
| 4926 win_T *wp; | |
| 4927 | |
| 4928 row = Y_2_ROW(y); | |
| 4929 col = X_2_COL(x); | |
| 4930 if (row < 0 || col < 0) /* before first window */ | |
| 4931 return NULL; | |
| 4932 wp = mouse_find_win(&row, &col); | |
| 4933 # ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
| 4934 if (State == HITRETURN || State == ASKMORE) | |
| 4935 { | |
| 4936 if (Y_2_ROW(y) >= msg_row) | |
| 4937 update_mouseshape(SHAPE_IDX_MOREL); | |
| 4938 else | |
| 4939 update_mouseshape(SHAPE_IDX_MORE); | |
| 4940 } | |
| 4941 else if (row > wp->w_height) /* below status line */ | |
| 4942 update_mouseshape(SHAPE_IDX_CLINE); | |
| 4943 # ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT | |
| 4944 else if (!(State & CMDLINE) && W_VSEP_WIDTH(wp) > 0 && col == wp->w_width | |
| 819 | 4945 && (row != wp->w_height || !stl_connected(wp)) && msg_scrolled == 0) |
| 7 | 4946 update_mouseshape(SHAPE_IDX_VSEP); |
| 4947 # endif | |
| 4948 else if (!(State & CMDLINE) && W_STATUS_HEIGHT(wp) > 0 | |
| 819 | 4949 && row == wp->w_height && msg_scrolled == 0) |
| 7 | 4950 update_mouseshape(SHAPE_IDX_STATUS); |
| 4951 else | |
| 4952 update_mouseshape(-2); | |
| 4953 # endif | |
| 4954 return wp; | |
| 4955 #else | |
| 4956 return firstwin; | |
| 4957 #endif | |
| 4958 } | |
| 4959 | |
| 4960 /* | |
| 4961 * ":gui" and ":gvim": Change from the terminal version to the GUI version. | |
| 4962 * File names may be given to redefine the args list. | |
| 4963 */ | |
| 4964 void | |
| 4965 ex_gui(eap) | |
| 4966 exarg_T *eap; | |
| 4967 { | |
| 4968 char_u *arg = eap->arg; | |
| 4969 | |
| 4970 /* | |
| 4971 * Check for "-f" argument: foreground, don't fork. | |
| 4972 * Also don't fork when started with "gvim -f". | |
| 4973 * Do fork when using "gui -b". | |
| 4974 */ | |
| 4975 if (arg[0] == '-' | |
| 4976 && (arg[1] == 'f' || arg[1] == 'b') | |
| 4977 && (arg[2] == NUL || vim_iswhite(arg[2]))) | |
| 4978 { | |
| 4979 gui.dofork = (arg[1] == 'b'); | |
| 4980 eap->arg = skipwhite(eap->arg + 2); | |
| 4981 } | |
| 4982 if (!gui.in_use) | |
| 4983 { | |
| 4984 /* Clear the command. Needed for when forking+exiting, to avoid part | |
| 4985 * of the argument ending up after the shell prompt. */ | |
| 4986 msg_clr_eos_force(); | |
| 4987 gui_start(); | |
|
2209
d0ddf7ba1630
Included the patch to support netbeans in a terminal.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2208
diff
changeset
|
4988 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG |
| 2210 | 4989 netbeans_gui_register(); |
|
2209
d0ddf7ba1630
Included the patch to support netbeans in a terminal.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2208
diff
changeset
|
4990 #endif |
| 7 | 4991 } |
| 4992 if (!ends_excmd(*eap->arg)) | |
| 4993 ex_next(eap); | |
| 4994 } | |
| 4995 | |
| 4996 #if ((defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) || defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W32) \ | |
| 574 | 4997 || defined(FEAT_GUI_PHOTON)) && defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR)) || defined(PROTO) |
| 7 | 4998 /* |
| 4999 * This is shared between Athena, Motif and GTK. | |
| 5000 */ | |
| 236 | 5001 static void gfp_setname __ARGS((char_u *fname, void *cookie)); |
| 7 | 5002 |
| 5003 /* | |
| 5004 * Callback function for do_in_runtimepath(). | |
| 5005 */ | |
| 5006 static void | |
| 236 | 5007 gfp_setname(fname, cookie) |
| 7 | 5008 char_u *fname; |
| 236 | 5009 void *cookie; |
| 7 | 5010 { |
| 236 | 5011 char_u *gfp_buffer = cookie; |
| 5012 | |
| 7 | 5013 if (STRLEN(fname) >= MAXPATHL) |
| 5014 *gfp_buffer = NUL; | |
| 5015 else | |
| 5016 STRCPY(gfp_buffer, fname); | |
| 5017 } | |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 /* | |
| 5020 * Find the path of bitmap "name" with extension "ext" in 'runtimepath'. | |
| 5021 * Return FAIL for failure and OK if buffer[MAXPATHL] contains the result. | |
| 5022 */ | |
| 5023 int | |
| 5024 gui_find_bitmap(name, buffer, ext) | |
| 5025 char_u *name; | |
| 5026 char_u *buffer; | |
| 5027 char *ext; | |
| 5028 { | |
| 5029 if (STRLEN(name) > MAXPATHL - 14) | |
| 5030 return FAIL; | |
| 273 | 5031 vim_snprintf((char *)buffer, MAXPATHL, "bitmaps/%s.%s", name, ext); |
| 236 | 5032 if (do_in_runtimepath(buffer, FALSE, gfp_setname, buffer) == FAIL |
| 5033 || *buffer == NUL) | |
| 7 | 5034 return FAIL; |
| 5035 return OK; | |
| 5036 } | |
| 5037 | |
|
2277
f42e0b5ff9e9
Change remaining HAVE_GTK2 to FEAT_GUI_GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
5038 # if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(PROTO) |
| 7 | 5039 /* |
| 5040 * Given the name of the "icon=" argument, try finding the bitmap file for the | |
| 5041 * icon. If it is an absolute path name, use it as it is. Otherwise append | |
| 5042 * "ext" and search for it in 'runtimepath'. | |
| 5043 * The result is put in "buffer[MAXPATHL]". If something fails "buffer" | |
| 5044 * contains "name". | |
| 5045 */ | |
| 5046 void | |
| 5047 gui_find_iconfile(name, buffer, ext) | |
| 5048 char_u *name; | |
| 5049 char_u *buffer; | |
| 5050 char *ext; | |
| 5051 { | |
| 5052 char_u buf[MAXPATHL + 1]; | |
| 5053 | |
| 5054 expand_env(name, buffer, MAXPATHL); | |
| 5055 if (!mch_isFullName(buffer) && gui_find_bitmap(buffer, buf, ext) == OK) | |
| 5056 STRCPY(buffer, buf); | |
| 5057 } | |
| 5058 # endif | |
| 5059 #endif | |
| 5060 | |
| 574 | 5061 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_X11) || defined(PROTO) |
| 7 | 5062 void |
| 5063 display_errors() | |
| 5064 { | |
| 5065 char_u *p; | |
| 5066 | |
| 5067 if (isatty(2)) | |
| 5068 fflush(stderr); | |
| 5069 else if (error_ga.ga_data != NULL) | |
| 5070 { | |
| 5071 /* avoid putting up a message box with blanks only */ | |
| 5072 for (p = (char_u *)error_ga.ga_data; *p != NUL; ++p) | |
| 5073 if (!isspace(*p)) | |
| 5074 { | |
| 5075 /* Truncate a very long message, it will go off-screen. */ | |
| 5076 if (STRLEN(p) > 2000) | |
| 5077 STRCPY(p + 2000 - 14, "...(truncated)"); | |
| 5078 (void)do_dialog(VIM_ERROR, (char_u *)_("Error"), | |
| 2684 | 5079 p, (char_u *)_("&Ok"), 1, NULL, FALSE); |
| 7 | 5080 break; |
| 5081 } | |
| 5082 ga_clear(&error_ga); | |
| 5083 } | |
| 5084 } | |
| 5085 #endif | |
| 5086 | |
| 5087 #if defined(NO_CONSOLE_INPUT) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5088 /* | |
| 5089 * Return TRUE if still starting up and there is no place to enter text. | |
| 5090 * For GTK and X11 we check if stderr is not a tty, which means we were | |
| 5091 * (probably) started from the desktop. Also check stdin, "vim >& file" does | |
| 5092 * allow typing on stdin. | |
| 5093 */ | |
| 5094 int | |
| 5095 no_console_input() | |
| 5096 { | |
| 5097 return ((!gui.in_use || gui.starting) | |
| 5098 # ifndef NO_CONSOLE | |
| 5099 && !isatty(0) && !isatty(2) | |
| 5100 # endif | |
| 5101 ); | |
| 5102 } | |
| 5103 #endif | |
| 5104 | |
| 28 | 5105 #if defined(FIND_REPLACE_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_SUN_WORKSHOP) \ |
| 1002 | 5106 || defined(NEED_GUI_UPDATE_SCREEN) \ |
| 28 | 5107 || defined(PROTO) |
| 7 | 5108 /* |
| 5109 * Update the current window and the screen. | |
| 5110 */ | |
| 5111 void | |
| 5112 gui_update_screen() | |
| 5113 { | |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5114 #ifdef FEAT_CONCEAL |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5115 linenr_T conceal_old_cursor_line = 0; |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5116 linenr_T conceal_new_cursor_line = 0; |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5117 int conceal_update_lines = FALSE; |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5118 #endif |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5119 |
| 7 | 5120 update_topline(); |
| 5121 validate_cursor(); | |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5122 |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5123 #if defined(FEAT_AUTOCMD) || defined(FEAT_CONCEAL) |
| 1584 | 5124 /* Trigger CursorMoved if the cursor moved. */ |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5125 if (!finish_op && ( |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5126 # ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5127 has_cursormoved() |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5128 # endif |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5129 # if defined(FEAT_AUTOCMD) && defined(FEAT_CONCEAL) |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5130 || |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5131 # endif |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5132 # ifdef FEAT_CONCEAL |
|
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
5133 curwin->w_p_cole > 0 |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5134 # endif |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5135 ) |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5136 && !equalpos(last_cursormoved, curwin->w_cursor)) |
| 1584 | 5137 { |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5138 # ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5139 if (has_cursormoved()) |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5140 apply_autocmds(EVENT_CURSORMOVED, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf); |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5141 # endif |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5142 # ifdef FEAT_CONCEAL |
|
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
5143 if (curwin->w_p_cole > 0) |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5144 { |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5145 conceal_old_cursor_line = last_cursormoved.lnum; |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5146 conceal_new_cursor_line = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5147 conceal_update_lines = TRUE; |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5148 } |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5149 # endif |
| 1584 | 5150 last_cursormoved = curwin->w_cursor; |
| 5151 } | |
| 5152 #endif | |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5153 |
| 7 | 5154 update_screen(0); /* may need to update the screen */ |
| 5155 setcursor(); | |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5156 # if defined(FEAT_CONCEAL) |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5157 if (conceal_update_lines |
|
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
5158 && (conceal_old_cursor_line != conceal_new_cursor_line |
|
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
5159 || conceal_cursor_line(curwin) |
|
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
5160 || need_cursor_line_redraw)) |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5161 { |
|
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
5162 if (conceal_old_cursor_line != conceal_new_cursor_line) |
|
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
5163 update_single_line(curwin, conceal_old_cursor_line); |
|
2282
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5164 update_single_line(curwin, conceal_new_cursor_line); |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5165 curwin->w_valid &= ~VALID_CROW; |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5166 } |
|
a888ed7ba375
Make updating text for conceal mode simpler. A few compiler warning fixes.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2277
diff
changeset
|
5167 # endif |
| 7 | 5168 out_flush(); /* make sure output has been written */ |
| 5169 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 5170 gui_mch_flush(); | |
| 5171 } | |
| 5172 #endif | |
| 5173 | |
| 28 | 5174 #if defined(FIND_REPLACE_DIALOG) || defined(PROTO) |
| 7 | 5175 static void concat_esc __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *text, int what)); |
| 5176 | |
| 5177 /* | |
| 5178 * Get the text to use in a find/replace dialog. Uses the last search pattern | |
| 5179 * if the argument is empty. | |
| 5180 * Returns an allocated string. | |
| 5181 */ | |
| 5182 char_u * | |
| 5183 get_find_dialog_text(arg, wwordp, mcasep) | |
| 5184 char_u *arg; | |
| 5185 int *wwordp; /* return: TRUE if \< \> found */ | |
| 5186 int *mcasep; /* return: TRUE if \C found */ | |
| 5187 { | |
| 5188 char_u *text; | |
| 5189 | |
| 5190 if (*arg == NUL) | |
| 5191 text = last_search_pat(); | |
| 5192 else | |
| 5193 text = arg; | |
| 5194 if (text != NULL) | |
| 5195 { | |
| 5196 text = vim_strsave(text); | |
| 5197 if (text != NULL) | |
| 5198 { | |
| 835 | 5199 int len = (int)STRLEN(text); |
| 7 | 5200 int i; |
| 5201 | |
| 5202 /* Remove "\V" */ | |
| 5203 if (len >= 2 && STRNCMP(text, "\\V", 2) == 0) | |
| 5204 { | |
| 5205 mch_memmove(text, text + 2, (size_t)(len - 1)); | |
| 5206 len -= 2; | |
| 5207 } | |
| 5208 | |
| 5209 /* Recognize "\c" and "\C" and remove. */ | |
| 5210 if (len >= 2 && *text == '\\' && (text[1] == 'c' || text[1] == 'C')) | |
| 5211 { | |
| 5212 *mcasep = (text[1] == 'C'); | |
| 5213 mch_memmove(text, text + 2, (size_t)(len - 1)); | |
| 5214 len -= 2; | |
| 5215 } | |
| 5216 | |
| 5217 /* Recognize "\<text\>" and remove. */ | |
| 5218 if (len >= 4 | |
| 5219 && STRNCMP(text, "\\<", 2) == 0 | |
| 5220 && STRNCMP(text + len - 2, "\\>", 2) == 0) | |
| 5221 { | |
| 5222 *wwordp = TRUE; | |
| 5223 mch_memmove(text, text + 2, (size_t)(len - 4)); | |
| 5224 text[len - 4] = NUL; | |
| 5225 } | |
| 5226 | |
| 5227 /* Recognize "\/" or "\?" and remove. */ | |
| 5228 for (i = 0; i + 1 < len; ++i) | |
| 5229 if (text[i] == '\\' && (text[i + 1] == '/' | |
| 5230 || text[i + 1] == '?')) | |
| 5231 { | |
| 5232 mch_memmove(text + i, text + i + 1, (size_t)(len - i)); | |
| 5233 --len; | |
| 5234 } | |
| 5235 } | |
| 5236 } | |
| 5237 return text; | |
| 5238 } | |
| 5239 | |
| 5240 /* | |
| 5241 * Concatenate "text" to grow array "gap", escaping "what" with a backslash. | |
| 5242 */ | |
| 5243 static void | |
| 5244 concat_esc(gap, text, what) | |
| 5245 garray_T *gap; | |
| 5246 char_u *text; | |
| 5247 int what; | |
| 5248 { | |
| 5249 while (*text != NUL) | |
| 5250 { | |
| 5251 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
| 474 | 5252 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(text); |
| 819 | 5253 |
| 7 | 5254 if (l > 1) |
| 5255 { | |
| 5256 while (--l >= 0) | |
| 5257 ga_append(gap, *text++); | |
| 5258 continue; | |
| 5259 } | |
| 5260 #endif | |
| 5261 if (*text == what) | |
| 5262 ga_append(gap, '\\'); | |
| 5263 ga_append(gap, *text); | |
| 5264 ++text; | |
| 5265 } | |
| 5266 } | |
| 5267 | |
| 5268 /* | |
| 5269 * Handle the press of a button in the find-replace dialog. | |
| 5270 * Return TRUE when something was added to the input buffer. | |
| 5271 */ | |
| 5272 int | |
| 5273 gui_do_findrepl(flags, find_text, repl_text, down) | |
| 5274 int flags; /* one of FRD_REPLACE, FRD_FINDNEXT, etc. */ | |
| 5275 char_u *find_text; | |
| 5276 char_u *repl_text; | |
| 5277 int down; /* Search downwards. */ | |
| 5278 { | |
| 5279 garray_T ga; | |
| 5280 int i; | |
| 5281 int type = (flags & FRD_TYPE_MASK); | |
| 5282 char_u *p; | |
| 28 | 5283 regmatch_T regmatch; |
| 482 | 5284 int save_did_emsg = did_emsg; |
| 1943 | 5285 static int busy = FALSE; |
| 5286 | |
| 5287 /* When the screen is being updated we should not change buffers and | |
| 5288 * windows structures, it may cause freed memory to be used. Also don't | |
| 5289 * do this recursively (pressing "Find" quickly several times. */ | |
| 5290 if (updating_screen || busy) | |
| 5291 return FALSE; | |
| 5292 | |
| 5293 /* refuse replace when text cannot be changed */ | |
| 5294 if ((type == FRD_REPLACE || type == FRD_REPLACEALL) && text_locked()) | |
| 5295 return FALSE; | |
| 5296 | |
| 5297 busy = TRUE; | |
| 7 | 5298 |
| 5299 ga_init2(&ga, 1, 100); | |
| 28 | 5300 if (type == FRD_REPLACEALL) |
| 7 | 5301 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"%s/"); |
| 5302 | |
| 5303 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"\\V"); | |
| 5304 if (flags & FRD_MATCH_CASE) | |
| 5305 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"\\C"); | |
| 5306 else | |
| 5307 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"\\c"); | |
| 5308 if (flags & FRD_WHOLE_WORD) | |
| 5309 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"\\<"); | |
| 5310 if (type == FRD_REPLACEALL || down) | |
| 5311 concat_esc(&ga, find_text, '/'); /* escape slashes */ | |
| 5312 else | |
| 5313 concat_esc(&ga, find_text, '?'); /* escape '?' */ | |
| 5314 if (flags & FRD_WHOLE_WORD) | |
| 5315 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"\\>"); | |
| 5316 | |
| 5317 if (type == FRD_REPLACEALL) | |
| 5318 { | |
| 28 | 5319 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"/"); |
| 694 | 5320 /* escape / and \ */ |
| 5321 p = vim_strsave_escaped(repl_text, (char_u *)"/\\"); | |
| 5322 if (p != NULL) | |
| 5323 ga_concat(&ga, p); | |
| 5324 vim_free(p); | |
| 28 | 5325 ga_concat(&ga, (char_u *)"/g"); |
| 5326 } | |
| 5327 ga_append(&ga, NUL); | |
| 5328 | |
| 5329 if (type == FRD_REPLACE) | |
| 5330 { | |
| 5331 /* Do the replacement when the text at the cursor matches. Thus no | |
| 5332 * replacement is done if the cursor was moved! */ | |
| 5333 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(ga.ga_data, RE_MAGIC + RE_STRING); | |
| 5334 regmatch.rm_ic = 0; | |
| 5335 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL) | |
| 5336 { | |
| 5337 p = ml_get_cursor(); | |
| 5338 if (vim_regexec_nl(®match, p, (colnr_T)0) | |
| 5339 && regmatch.startp[0] == p) | |
| 5340 { | |
| 5341 /* Clear the command line to remove any old "No match" | |
| 5342 * error. */ | |
| 5343 msg_end_prompt(); | |
| 5344 | |
| 5345 if (u_save_cursor() == OK) | |
| 5346 { | |
| 5347 /* A button was pressed thus undo should be synced. */ | |
| 825 | 5348 u_sync(FALSE); |
| 28 | 5349 |
| 5350 del_bytes((long)(regmatch.endp[0] - regmatch.startp[0]), | |
| 609 | 5351 FALSE, FALSE); |
| 28 | 5352 ins_str(repl_text); |
| 5353 } | |
| 5354 } | |
| 5355 else | |
| 5356 MSG(_("No match at cursor, finding next")); | |
|
4805
66803af09906
updated for version 7.3.1149
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4352
diff
changeset
|
5357 vim_regfree(regmatch.regprog); |
| 28 | 5358 } |
| 5359 } | |
| 5360 | |
| 5361 if (type == FRD_REPLACEALL) | |
| 5362 { | |
| 7 | 5363 /* A button was pressed, thus undo should be synced. */ |
| 825 | 5364 u_sync(FALSE); |
| 7 | 5365 do_cmdline_cmd(ga.ga_data); |
| 5366 } | |
| 5367 else | |
| 5368 { | |
| 5369 /* Search for the next match. */ | |
| 5370 i = msg_scroll; | |
| 5371 do_search(NULL, down ? '/' : '?', ga.ga_data, 1L, | |
| 1521 | 5372 SEARCH_MSG + SEARCH_MARK, NULL); |
| 7 | 5373 msg_scroll = i; /* don't let an error message set msg_scroll */ |
| 5374 } | |
| 5375 | |
| 482 | 5376 /* Don't want to pass did_emsg to other code, it may cause disabling |
| 5377 * syntax HL if we were busy redrawing. */ | |
| 5378 did_emsg = save_did_emsg; | |
| 5379 | |
| 7 | 5380 if (State & (NORMAL | INSERT)) |
| 5381 { | |
| 5382 gui_update_screen(); /* update the screen */ | |
| 5383 msg_didout = 0; /* overwrite any message */ | |
| 5384 need_wait_return = FALSE; /* don't wait for return */ | |
| 5385 } | |
| 5386 | |
| 5387 vim_free(ga.ga_data); | |
| 1943 | 5388 busy = FALSE; |
| 7 | 5389 return (ga.ga_len > 0); |
| 5390 } | |
| 5391 | |
| 5392 #endif | |
| 5393 | |
| 5394 #if (defined(FEAT_DND) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)) \ | |
| 5395 || defined(FEAT_GUI_MSWIN) \ | |
| 5396 || defined(FEAT_GUI_MAC) \ | |
| 5397 || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5398 | |
| 5399 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS | |
| 5400 static void gui_wingoto_xy __ARGS((int x, int y)); | |
| 5401 | |
| 5402 /* | |
| 5403 * Jump to the window at specified point (x, y). | |
| 5404 */ | |
| 5405 static void | |
| 5406 gui_wingoto_xy(x, y) | |
| 5407 int x; | |
| 5408 int y; | |
| 5409 { | |
| 5410 int row = Y_2_ROW(y); | |
| 5411 int col = X_2_COL(x); | |
| 5412 win_T *wp; | |
| 5413 | |
| 5414 if (row >= 0 && col >= 0) | |
| 5415 { | |
| 5416 wp = mouse_find_win(&row, &col); | |
| 5417 if (wp != NULL && wp != curwin) | |
| 5418 win_goto(wp); | |
| 5419 } | |
| 5420 } | |
| 5421 #endif | |
| 5422 | |
| 5423 /* | |
| 5424 * Process file drop. Mouse cursor position, key modifiers, name of files | |
| 5425 * and count of files are given. Argument "fnames[count]" has full pathnames | |
| 5426 * of dropped files, they will be freed in this function, and caller can't use | |
| 5427 * fnames after call this function. | |
| 5428 */ | |
| 5429 void | |
| 5430 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, count) | |
| 1887 | 5431 int x UNUSED; |
| 5432 int y UNUSED; | |
| 7 | 5433 int_u modifiers; |
| 5434 char_u **fnames; | |
| 5435 int count; | |
| 5436 { | |
| 5437 int i; | |
| 5438 char_u *p; | |
| 1668 | 5439 static int entered = FALSE; |
| 5440 | |
| 5441 /* | |
| 5442 * This function is called by event handlers. Just in case we get a | |
| 5443 * second event before the first one is handled, ignore the second one. | |
| 5444 * Not sure if this can ever happen, just in case. | |
| 5445 */ | |
| 5446 if (entered) | |
| 5447 return; | |
| 5448 entered = TRUE; | |
| 7 | 5449 |
| 5450 /* | |
| 5451 * When the cursor is at the command line, add the file names to the | |
| 5452 * command line, don't edit the files. | |
| 5453 */ | |
| 5454 if (State & CMDLINE) | |
| 5455 { | |
| 5456 shorten_filenames(fnames, count); | |
| 5457 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
| 5458 { | |
| 5459 if (fnames[i] != NULL) | |
| 5460 { | |
| 5461 if (i > 0) | |
| 5462 add_to_input_buf((char_u*)" ", 1); | |
| 5463 | |
| 5464 /* We don't know what command is used thus we can't be sure | |
| 5465 * about which characters need to be escaped. Only escape the | |
| 5466 * most common ones. */ | |
| 5467 # ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME | |
| 5468 p = vim_strsave_escaped(fnames[i], (char_u *)" \t\"|"); | |
| 5469 # else | |
| 5470 p = vim_strsave_escaped(fnames[i], (char_u *)"\\ \t\"|"); | |
| 5471 # endif | |
| 5472 if (p != NULL) | |
| 1364 | 5473 add_to_input_buf_csi(p, (int)STRLEN(p)); |
| 7 | 5474 vim_free(p); |
| 5475 vim_free(fnames[i]); | |
| 5476 } | |
| 5477 } | |
| 5478 vim_free(fnames); | |
| 5479 } | |
| 5480 else | |
| 5481 { | |
| 5482 /* Go to the window under mouse cursor, then shorten given "fnames" by | |
| 5483 * current window, because a window can have local current dir. */ | |
| 5484 # ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS | |
| 5485 gui_wingoto_xy(x, y); | |
| 5486 # endif | |
| 5487 shorten_filenames(fnames, count); | |
| 5488 | |
| 5489 /* If Shift held down, remember the first item. */ | |
| 5490 if ((modifiers & MOUSE_SHIFT) != 0) | |
| 5491 p = vim_strsave(fnames[0]); | |
| 5492 else | |
| 5493 p = NULL; | |
| 5494 | |
| 5495 /* Handle the drop, :edit or :split to get to the file. This also | |
| 5496 * frees fnames[]. Skip this if there is only one item it's a | |
| 5497 * directory and Shift is held down. */ | |
| 5498 if (count == 1 && (modifiers & MOUSE_SHIFT) != 0 | |
| 5499 && mch_isdir(fnames[0])) | |
| 5500 { | |
| 5501 vim_free(fnames[0]); | |
| 5502 vim_free(fnames); | |
| 5503 } | |
| 5504 else | |
| 5505 handle_drop(count, fnames, (modifiers & MOUSE_CTRL) != 0); | |
| 5506 | |
| 5507 /* If Shift held down, change to first file's directory. If the first | |
| 5508 * item is a directory, change to that directory (and let the explorer | |
| 5509 * plugin show the contents). */ | |
| 5510 if (p != NULL) | |
| 5511 { | |
| 5512 if (mch_isdir(p)) | |
| 5513 { | |
| 5514 if (mch_chdir((char *)p) == 0) | |
| 5515 shorten_fnames(TRUE); | |
| 5516 } | |
| 5517 else if (vim_chdirfile(p) == OK) | |
| 5518 shorten_fnames(TRUE); | |
| 5519 vim_free(p); | |
| 5520 } | |
| 5521 | |
| 5522 /* Update the screen display */ | |
| 5523 update_screen(NOT_VALID); | |
| 5524 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 5525 gui_update_menus(0); | |
| 5526 # endif | |
|
2208
495995b9ce7d
Fix: window title not updated after file dropped.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
5527 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE |
|
495995b9ce7d
Fix: window title not updated after file dropped.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
5528 maketitle(); |
|
495995b9ce7d
Fix: window title not updated after file dropped.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
5529 #endif |
| 7 | 5530 setcursor(); |
| 5531 out_flush(); | |
| 5532 gui_update_cursor(FALSE, FALSE); | |
| 5533 gui_mch_flush(); | |
| 5534 } | |
| 1668 | 5535 |
| 5536 entered = FALSE; | |
| 7 | 5537 } |
| 5538 #endif |